FCC ID: B94HHI14CN iPAQ 600 series

HP iPAQ Product Guide Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. HP iPAQ products are powered by Microsoft Windows Mobile 6 Professional with Messaging and Security Feature Pack. Microsoft Windows, the Windows logo, Outlook, Windows Mobile Device Center, and ActiveSync are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. under license. All other product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. Hewlett-Packard Company shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. The information is provided as is without warranty of any kind and is subject to change without notice. The warranties for Hewlett-Packard products are set forth in the express limited warranty statements accompanying such products. Nothing herein should be construed as an additional warranty. This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. August 2007 Document Part Number: 455719001 Table of contents 1 Register your HP iPAQ 2 Box contents 3 Components Front panel components ....................................................................................................................... 3 Top and bottom panel components ...................................................................................................... 4 Left and right side components ............................................................................................................ 5 Back panel components ....................................................................................................................... 6 4 Set up your HP iPAQ Step 1: Remove the battery cover and insert the SIM card .................................................................. 7 Step 2: Install the battery and replace the battery cover ...................................................................... 8 Step 3: Charge the battery ................................................................................................................... 9 Step 4: Turn on your HP iPAQ ............................................................................................................. 9 Protect your HP iPAQ with a password ................................................................................................ 9 Find the serial and model number ...................................................................................................... 10 Status Icons ........................................................................................................................................ 10 5 Learn the basics The Today screen .............................................................................................................................. 12 TodayPanel Lite ................................................................................................................................. 12 Enter text ............................................................................................................................................ 13 Customize your HP iPAQ ................................................................................................................... 14 Device information ............................................................................................................. 14 Enter owner information ..................................................................................................... 14 Change the regional settings ............................................................................................. 14 Adjust the volume .............................................................................................................. 15 Change the power management settings .......................................................................... 15 Dim or adjust the brightness of the backlight ..................................................................... 15 Install and remove programs ............................................................................................. 16 Open and close programs ................................................................................................. 16 Set alarms and clocks ........................................................................................................ 16 Shortcut menus .................................................................................................................. 17 Display the clock in title bar ............................................................................................... 17 Create and assign a category ............................................................................................ 17 Adjust the speed for scrolling through items in a list .......................................................... 17 View the Operating System (OS) information .................................................................................... 17 Lock and unlock your HP iPAQ .......................................................................................................... 18 Battery saving tips .............................................................................................................................. 18 6 Use your Business Navigator iii Use the keypad .................................................................................................................................. 19 Smart-Touch Navigation wheel .......................................................................................... 19 Answer/Send key ............................................................................................................... 19 End key .............................................................................................................................. 19 Enter key ............................................................................................................................ 19 Back space key .................................................................................................................. 19 Softkeys ............................................................................................................................. 19 3-Way Thumb-Wheel ......................................................................................................................... 19 Call features ....................................................................................................................................... 20 Make a call ......................................................................................................................... 20 Answer a call ..................................................................................................................... 20 Call waiting ........................................................................................................................ 20 Redial a number ................................................................................................................ 20 Call a contact ..................................................................................................................... 20 Make a call from the Today screen ................................................................... 21 Make a call from the contacts ........................................................................... 21 Change the default number for a contact .......................................................... 21 Make emergency calls ....................................................................................................... 21 Make calls using speed dials ............................................................................................. 21 Voice mail .......................................................................................................................... 22 Handsfree function ............................................................................................................. 22 Monitor phone usage ......................................................................................................... 22 Make data calls .................................................................................................................. 22 Mute a call ......................................................................................................................... 23 Put a call on hold ............................................................................................................... 23 Make a conference call ...................................................................................................... 23 Make a call from a hyperlink phone number ...................................................................... 23 Dial international numbers ................................................................................................. 23 Call history .......................................................................................................................................... 24 Manage calls using call history .......................................................................................... 24 Make calls using call history .............................................................................................. 24 View call details ................................................................................................................. 24 Voice commands ................................................................................................................................ 24 Check connection and signal strength ............................................................................................... 25 Change the SIM PIN .......................................................................................................................... 25 Change service settings ..................................................................................................................... 26 Change phone service settings ......................................................................................... 26 Forward calls ..................................................................................................... 26 Configure caller ID ............................................................................................ 26 Block calls ......................................................................................................... 26 Set up voice mail or text messaging center number ......................................... 26 Limit calls to specific area codes or phone numbers ........................................ 27 Change network settings .................................................................................................................... 27 Change phone network settings ........................................................................................ 27 View available phone networks ......................................................................................... 27 Set preferred networks ...................................................................................................... 27 Manually selecting a phone Network ................................................................................. 28 Change the ring tone and ring type .................................................................................................... 28 Take notes during a call ..................................................................................................................... 28 Select a frequency band automatically ............................................................................................... 29 iv Copy a contact from a SIM to a device .............................................................................................. 29 Add Tele-typewriter (TTY) functionality .............................................................................................. 29 Add TTY functionality for people who are deaf or hard-of-hearing .................................... 29 Enable TTY support ........................................................................................................... 30 Make a phone call using the TTY enabled HP iPAQ ......................................................... 30 Disable TTY support .......................................................................................................... 30 Voice notes ......................................................................................................................................... 31 Create voice votes ............................................................................................................. 31 Delete voice notes ............................................................................................................. 31 Listen to voice notes .......................................................................................................... 31 Rename voice notes .......................................................................................................... 32 Configure channels ............................................................................................................................ 32 HSDPA ............................................................................................................................................... 32 Differences between GSM and GPRS/EDGE/WCDMA/3G technology ............................................. 32 7 Camera Use the camera .................................................................................................................................. 33 Capture photos .................................................................................................................. 33 View photos ....................................................................................................................... 33 Change camera settings .................................................................................................................... 33 Change brightness settings ............................................................................................... 33 Change resolution settings ................................................................................................ 33 Change mode settings ....................................................................................................... 34 Video recorder .................................................................................................................................... 34 Record videos .................................................................................................................... 34 Configure video format ...................................................................................................... 35 Transfer images ................................................................................................................................. 35 Use GPRS ......................................................................................................................... 35 Use Bluetooth .................................................................................................................... 35 8 HP Photosmart Mobile HP Photosmart Mobile ....................................................................................................................... 36 Attach a voice note to a picture .......................................................................................................... 36 E-mail pictures .................................................................................................................................... 36 Snapfish ............................................................................................................................................. 37 View a slideshow ................................................................................................................................ 37 9 Notes Write a note ........................................................................................................................................ 38 Create a copy of a note ...................................................................................................................... 38 Create a voice note ............................................................................................................................ 38 10 Storage cards Use storage cards .............................................................................................................................. 40 Insert a storage card .......................................................................................................................... 40 Remove a storage card ...................................................................................................................... 40 View content of a storage card ........................................................................................................... 41 v 11 Synchronization Synchronization software ................................................................................................................... 42 Copy files ............................................................................................................................................ 42 Migrate data from Palm Desktop to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6 ...................................................... 42 Wireless Synchronization Cost Saving Tips ....................................................................................... 43 Troubleshoot synchronization Issues ................................................................................................. 43 Customized links in WMDC ................................................................................................................ 45 12 Tasks Set start and due dates for a task ...................................................................................................... 46 Show start and due dates in the task list ............................................................................................ 46 Set options for displaying tasks on the Today screen ........................................................................ 46 Mark a task as completed .................................................................................................................. 46 13 Messaging Understand messages ....................................................................................................................... 47 Folder types ........................................................................................................................................ 47 Synchronize E-mail ............................................................................................................................ 48 Set up messaging accounts ............................................................................................................... 48 Set up e-mail using exchange server ................................................................................ 48 Internet E-mail ................................................................................................................... 49 Create a new POP3 or IMAP4 account ............................................................. 49 Change E-mail download options ..................................................................... 50 Delete an account ............................................................................................. 50 Text messaging ................................................................................................................. 51 MMS .................................................................................................................................. 51 MMS composer .................................................................................................................. 51 Receive attachments ......................................................................................................... 52 Receive meeting requests ................................................................................................. 52 Create or change a signature ............................................................................................ 53 Use messaging ................................................................................................................................... 53 Compose and send messages .......................................................................................... 53 Reply or forward a message .............................................................................................. 54 Add an attachment to a message ...................................................................................... 54 Download messages ......................................................................................................... 54 Download messages from a server ................................................................................... 54 Install an online address book ............................................................................................................ 55 14 Calendar Access calendar ................................................................................................................................. 56 Change the display of the work week ................................................................................................. 56 Set a default reminder for all new appointments ................................................................................ 56 Update an appointment ...................................................................................................................... 56 Cancel an appointment ...................................................................................................................... 57 15 Contacts Create a contact ................................................................................................................................. 58 Delete a contact ................................................................................................................................. 58 Change contact information ............................................................................................................... 58 vi Copy a contact ................................................................................................................................... 58 Find a contact ..................................................................................................................................... 59 Send an E-mail message to a contact ................................................................................................ 59 Send a text message to a contact ...................................................................................................... 59 Add and remove a picture .................................................................................................................. 60 Use the contact list ............................................................................................................................. 60 16 Connections iPAQ Wireless .................................................................................................................................... 61 WLAN ................................................................................................................................................. 62 WLAN Terms ..................................................................................................................... 62 Automatically connect to a WLAN network ........................................................................ 62 Manually connect to a WLAN network ............................................................................... 63 Find an IP address ............................................................................................................. 63 Delete a wireless network .................................................................................................. 63 Configure 802.1x authentication settings ........................................................................... 64 Bluetooth ............................................................................................................................................ 64 Bluetooth terms .................................................................................................................. 64 Bluetooth manager ............................................................................................................ 65 Connect to a computer via Bluetooth ................................................................................. 65 Use your HP iPAQ as a wireless modem with Bluetooth ................................................... 65 Bluetooth device profiles .................................................................................................... 66 Create, end, and accept a Bluetooth partnership .............................................................. 66 Rename a Bluetooth partnership ....................................................................................... 67 Pair and unpair devices ..................................................................................................... 68 Make a device discoverable .............................................................................................. 69 Open Bluetooth settings .................................................................................................... 69 Authorization to access services ....................................................................................... 69 Use a passkey or bond ...................................................................................................... 69 Set a Bluetooth shared folder ............................................................................................ 70 Set up an incoming or outgoing Bluetooth COM port ........................................................ 70 GPRS/EDGE ...................................................................................................................................... 70 GPRS/EDGE ..................................................................................................................... 70 Change GPRS network settings ........................................................................................ 71 Edit network parameters .................................................................................................... 71 Edit an Internet connection ............................................................................... 71 Edit MMS multimedia messages settings ......................................................... 72 Edit WAP information settings ........................................................................... 72 Troubleshoot automatic detection ...................................................................................... 72 Advanced settings .............................................................................................................................. 72 Connect to intranet URLs .................................................................................................. 72 Change an intranet URL .................................................................................................... 73 Set up an automatic choice for connections ...................................................................... 73 Set up proxy server settings .............................................................................................. 73 Set up a WAP gateway ...................................................................................................... 73 Configure advanced proxy settings ................................................................................... 74 Advanced connection settings ........................................................................................... 74 Set up a VPN server connection ........................................................................................ 75 Change a connection group name ..................................................................................... 75 End a connection ............................................................................................................... 75 vii Configure VoIP .................................................................................................................. 76 17 GPS navigation Google Maps ...................................................................................................................................... 77 Install Google Maps ........................................................................................................... 77 Launch and navigate Google Maps ................................................................................... 77 Uninstall Google Maps ....................................................................................................... 77 18 Applications HP applications .................................................................................................................................. 78 HP Help and Support ......................................................................................................... 78 HP Voice Reply .................................................................................................................. 78 HP iPAQ Setup Assistant .................................................................................................. 79 HP iPAQ Shortcuts ............................................................................................................ 80 Use HP iPAQ Shortcuts .................................................................................... 80 Edit HP iPAQ Shortcuts .................................................................................... 80 HP iPAQ DataConnect ...................................................................................................... 80 HP Asset Viewer ................................................................................................................ 81 Certificate Enroller ............................................................................................................. 81 Manage certificates ............................................................................................................ 82 HP iPAQ Tips ..................................................................................................................... 82 HP Voice Commander ....................................................................................................... 82 HP iPAQ Mobile Broadband Connect ................................................................................ 82 HP Enterprise Mobility Agent (mProveDM) ....................................................................... 83 HP iPAQ File Store ............................................................................................................ 83 HP PrintSmart Mobile ........................................................................................................ 83 HP Keyguard ..................................................................................................................... 83 HP SecureConnect Mobile ................................................................................................ 84 HP iPAQ Ring Tone Manager ............................................................................................ 84 HP iPAQ Audio Applet ....................................................................................................... 84 Pocket Internet Explorer (PIE) ........................................................................................... 85 Remote Desktop Mobile ..................................................................................................................... 85 Windows Media Player ....................................................................................................................... 86 Clear the Now Playing List ................................................................................................. 86 Update a Library ................................................................................................................ 86 Use HP Voice Commander to play media files .................................................................. 86 MS Office applications ........................................................................................................................ 86 Word Mobile ....................................................................................................................... 86 Excel Mobile ...................................................................................................................... 87 PowerPoint Mobile ............................................................................................................. 87 Games ................................................................................................................................................ 88 Bubble Breaker .................................................................................................................. 88 Solitaire .............................................................................................................................. 88 Internet Sharing .................................................................................................................................. 89 To connect to a laptop using a USB data connection ........................................................ 89 To connect to a laptop using Bluetooth data connection ................................................... 90 Internet Explorer ................................................................................................................................. 90 Windows Live Messenger .................................................................................................................. 90 Sign in and out of messenger ............................................................................................ 91 Send instant messages ..................................................................................................... 91 viii Change your status ............................................................................................................ 91 OMA DRM Client ................................................................................................................................ 92 Pocket Panel Lite ............................................................................................................................... 92 SMS cell broadcast ............................................................................................................................ 92 SIM Toolkit ......................................................................................................................................... 92 Sim Manager ...................................................................................................................................... 92 iPAQ power ........................................................................................................................................ 92 iPAQ backlight .................................................................................................................................... 92 TTY ..................................................................................................................................................... 92 19 Product specifications System specifications ......................................................................................................................... 93 Physical specifications ....................................................................................................................... 93 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................... 94 20 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission Notice ................................................................................... 95 Modifications ...................................................................................................................... 95 Cables ................................................................................................................................ 95 Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo (United States Only) . 95 Canadian Notice ................................................................................................................................. 96 Avis Canadien .................................................................................................................................... 96 European Union Notice ...................................................................................................................... 96 Products with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN Devices ................................................................. 97 France ............................................................................................................... 97 Italy .................................................................................................................... 97 Battery Warning .................................................................................................................................. 97 Battery Recycling ............................................................................................................................... 97 Battery Disposal ................................................................................................................................. 97 Equipment Warning ............................................................................................................................ 98 Acoustics Warning .............................................................................................................................. 98 Class 1 LED Product .......................................................................................................................... 99 Airline Travel Notice ........................................................................................................................... 99 Medical Electronic Equipment ............................................................................................................ 99 SAR Notice ......................................................................................................................................... 99 Wireless Notices ................................................................................................................................. 99 U.S. Regulatory Wireless Notice ..................................................................................... 100 Canadian Regulatory Wireless Notice ............................................................................. 100 Brazilian Notice ................................................................................................................ 100 Singaporean Wireless Notice .......................................................................................... 100 Japanese Notice ............................................................................................................................... 101 Wireless LAN 802.11b Devices ....................................................................................... 101 Wireless LAN 802.11g Devices ....................................................................................... 101 Bluetooth Devices ............................................................................................................ 101 Taiwan DGT Notice .......................................................................................................................... 101 Korean Notice ................................................................................................................................... 102 21 Frequently Asked Questions I am having trouble turning on my HP iPAQ. What should I do? ...................................................... 103 ix I am unable to make or receive calls. How do I fix this? .................................................................. 103 I have trouble connecting to the Internet. What should I do? ........................................................... 103 I am unable to hear voices clearly. How do I resolve this? .............................................................. 103 I cannot use certain call functions. What should I do? ..................................................................... 103 Why do I hear disturbing noises during a phone call? ...................................................................... 104 Why are the standby and talk time shorter at times? ....................................................................... 104 Why does the HP iPAQ operate slowly at times? ............................................................................ 104 Why do I see the Today screen layout error message on my HP iPAQ display screen? ................. 104 I have trouble charging my battery. What should I do? .................................................................... 104 I am unable to use the ActiveSync feature. What should I do? ........................................................ 104 My HP iPAQ was not connected during WMDC installation? ........................................................... 104 Which factors degrade the GPS signal and affect accuracy? .......................................................... 105 My HP iPAQ was not connected during WMDC installation? ........................................................... 105 My HP iPAQ was connected while I was installing but WMDC does not launch even after installation? ...................................................................................................................................... 105 Can I connect for the first time via Bluetooth? .................................................................................. 105 22 Guidelines for care and maintenance Use your HP iPAQ ............................................................................................................................ 106 Cleaning your HP iPAQ .................................................................................................................... 106 Carrying or storing your HP iPAQ .................................................................................................... 106 Use accessories ............................................................................................................................... 106 Use your HP iPAQ in public places .................................................................................................. 106 x 1 Register your HP iPAQ You need to register your HP iPAQ with Hewlett-Packard to be able to:

Access support and services, and get the most out of your HP products. Sign up for free support alerts, software updates, and personalized newsletters. Manage your profile. After registering your HP iPAQ, you will receive an e-mail message regarding special offers and promotions. Visit http://www.register.hp.com to register your HP iPAQ or update your mail or e-mail address after registration. You are required to enter your user ID and registration password to edit your profile online. NOTE: Registration is not supported in all countries/regions. 1 2 Box contents This illustration depicts the items that come in the box with your HP iPAQ. NOTE: Box contents vary by model.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) HP iPAQ Stylus 1590 mAh Li-Ion removable/rechargeable battery Getting Started CD with additional software HP iPAQ documentation Wired stereo headset NOTE: Listening to personal stereo equipment at full volume for long periods can damage hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing loss, do not spend much time listening to personal stereo equipment at full volume. HP recommends use of the headset manufactured by Merry, part number XXX, that is included with your HP iPAQ. AC adapter with interchangeable plug NOTE: The AC adapter is provided with one or more interchangeable plug, which might not be attached. Attach the correct plug for your country/region. Mini-USB charging/synchronization cable Screen protector film 2 Chapter 2 Box contents 3 Components NOTE: Not all models or features are available in all countries/regions. Front panel components Component Function

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Touch Screen Display Use to view the contents on the screen. Use stylus to select items, navigate menus, change feature settings, and play games. Right Softkey End Key Press to launch Messaging from the Today screen. Press to end a phone call. Back Space Key Press back space and clear text one at a time. Enter Key Power Key Press to open an application or insert a line break while typing messages. Press and hold to switch your HP iPAQ on or off. Smart-Touch Navigation Wheel Use to navigate and scroll through items on the screen. Keyboard Use keys on the keyboard to enter text, dial numbers, or navigate menus. Landscape/Portrait Key Press to switch between the landscape and portrait views. Front panel components 3 Component Function

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14) ok Key Windows Key Press to confirm your selection. Press to display the Start menu. Answer/Send Key Press to answer a call or to view the on-screen keypad. Left SoftKey LEDs Press to launch HP iPAQ Shortcuts from the Today screen. Solid Red Charging Flashing Amber One or more notifications received Solid Green Full Charged Flashing Red Low battery warning Flashing Green Within GPRS/GSM/EDGE/WCDMA/3G coverage area Flashing Blue WLAN or Bluetooth on Blue Off WLAN and Bluetooth off Top and bottom panel components Component Function

(1)

(2)

(3) Vibrate key Use to set your HP iPAQ in vibration mode. Charging/Communications Port Use to connect the mini-USB charging/synchronization cable. Reset Use to soft reset your HP iPAQ. WARNING! Resetting your HP iPAQ before turning it off might corrupt data present on your HP iPAQ. 4 Chapter 3 Components Left and right side components Component Function

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) ok Key Press to confirm your selection. 3-Way Thumb-Wheel Use to navigate and scroll through items on the screen and confirm your selection. HP Voice Commander Key Press to launch the HP Voice Commander application. Camera Key Test Port Press to use the camera and click pictures. Use to receive GPS signal. Left and right side components 5 Back panel components Component Function

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Back Speaker Use the speaker to listen to music or as a speakerphone. Self Portrait Mirror Use the mirror lens to center your own image for a self-photograph. Camera Stylus Cover Latch Battery Cover Flash Light With the camera turned on, frame the subject in the camera lens and view it on your HP iPAQ screen before capturing the photo. Remove and use to select elements on the screen and input information. Slide down to remove the stylus. Slide up to replace the stylus. Press the cover latch on the battery cover and slide the cover down and away from the HP iPAQ. Remove to insert or remove the battery and/or the SIM card. Turn on the flash light while capturing pictures in dim light. 6 Chapter 3 Components 4 Set up your HP iPAQ Step 1: Remove the battery cover and insert the SIM card Press the cover latch on the battery cover and slide the cover down and away from the HP iPAQ. 1. 2. Slide the SIM card slot cover and open it. Step 1: Remove the battery cover and insert the SIM card 7 3. Place the SIM card into the SIM card slot. NOTE: Make sure that the metal contacts are facing down and the notched corner is in the correct position. 4. Slide back the SIM card slot cover until it locks into place. Step 2: Install the battery and replace the battery cover

!

1. 2. Align the battery connectors on the battery with the housing pins in the battery compartment, and insert the battery. Place the battery cover down and slide up until it locks into place. 8 Chapter 4 Set up your HP iPAQ Step 3: Charge the battery iP A Q B u si n e s s N a vi g a t o r CAUTION: To avoid damaging your HP iPAQ or the AC adapter, make sure all connectors are properly aligned before connecting. The battery provides power for your HP iPAQ to operate. Use the mini-USB synchronization cable, that comes with your HP iPAQ, to charge the device. It takes approximately 24 hours to fully charge the battery for the first time. Subsequent charges might take longer. 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to an electrical outlet. 3. Connect the mini-USB synchronization cable to the charging/communications port on your Insert the USB end of the mini-USB synchronization cable into the port on the AC adapter. HP iPAQ. The cable connector only fits one way. If the connector does not insert easily, turn it over. TIP: You can also charge the battery by connecting your HP iPAQ to a USB port on your computer using the mini-USB synchronization cable. NOTE: Whenever a replacement battery is inserted into your HP iPAQ, press the Power key for at least two seconds. In case the device does not turn on, attach an AC adapter to turn on your HP iPAQ. Step 4: Turn on your HP iPAQ Press and hold the Power key to turn on your HP iPAQ. Next, follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. Use the on-screen keypad to enter information. Protect your HP iPAQ with a password You can secure data on your HP iPAQ by setting a password. Each time you turn on your HP iPAQ, you will be prompted to enter the password. To set a password:

1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > Lock. Select the Prompt if device unused for check box. Then, select the amount of time your HP iPAQ should remain unused before you are prompted to enter the password. In the Password type list, select the type of password you would like to use. Next, enter the password, and then confirm the password. 3. Step 3: Charge the battery 9 4. On the Hint tab, enter a phrase to help you remember your password. Make sure that your hint does not allow others to guess your password. The hint is displayed after the wrong password is entered five times in a row. 5. When prompted, tap ok. The next time your HP iPAQ is unused for the specified amount of time, you are prompted to enter your password. TIP: Use the same steps as above to change or reset your password. Find the serial and model number Locate the serial and model numbers before contacting HP Customer Support, particularly if you are calling for in-warranty support. View the serial number and model ID by tapping Start > Programs > HP Help and Support > Serial and Model Number. To locate the serial and model number:

1. Remove the battery cover. 2. Remove the battery from the unit. 3. NOTE: Tap Start > Settings > System > HP Asset Viewer > Identity to view the serial number and tap Start > Settings > System > HP Asset Viewer > System to view the model number on your HP iPAQ. Locate the label containing the product ID and serial number underneath the battery. Status Icons The following table lists the common status indicators and their meanings. Icon Status Icon Status Missed call Voice call active No SIM card installed Call forwarding active Call on hold SIM card fault New Voice mail New e-mail or SMS Instant message received Battery level Battery level low Vibrate mode on Battery charging Sync error 10 Chapter 4 Set up your HP iPAQ Icon Status Ringer off Wi-Fi on Roaming Icon Status Speaker phone on Bluetooth General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) available GPRS available in roaming GPRS in use Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution

(EDGE) available EDGE available in roaming EDGE in use Phone connection unavailable or network error Signal strength Radio off Status Icons 11 5 Learn the basics Get started with your HP iPAQ by learning basic functions such as knowing the Today screen, entering text, and synchronizing data. The Today screen Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Today. The Today screen displays the date and time and provides a quick status of the remaining battery capacity, upcoming appointments, your current profile, and the number of unread text messages. At the top of the Today screen, connectivity icons, volume indicator, and clock are displayed. To customize the Today screen:

1. 2. On the Appearance tab, select the required theme for the background of the Today screen. 3. On the Items tab, select the items to appear on the Today screen. TIP: To move the order in which the items appear, tap Start > Settings > Personal > Today. On the Items tab, tap Move Up or Move Down. NOTE: There are two default softkeys on the bottom of the Today screen: Shortcuts and Messaging. On the Today screen, the Messaging softkey is also the Notification softkey. Any type of alert, such as a meeting reminder, is displayed on the Today screen as a notification. TodayPanel Lite Icon Name Description TodayPanel Lite Battery power Main memory Storage memory Backlight Use to change the TodayPanel Lite options or the Today screen settings. Use to view the amount of remaining battery turn on your HP iPAQ. Set the standby period, time duration for turning off the HP iPAQ, and USB charging method. Use to view the amount of available main memory on your HP iPAQ. View, activate, and stop all running programs from this screen. Use to view the amount of available storage memory on your HP iPAQ. View, activate, and stop all running programs from this screen. Use to view and change the backlight options on your HP iPAQ. To use TodayPanel Lite, tap the required icon, make the necessary changes, and tap ok. 12 Chapter 5 Learn the basics You can change the TodayPanel Lite icons to compact mode, which allows more space on the Today screen. You can also change the memory and storage settings to display as percentages instead of file sizes. To change the TodayPanel Lite icons to compact mode:

1.

(TodayPanel Lite) icon > Options to open the TodayPanel Lite application. Tap the Tap the Display Mode list and select Compact. 2. To display memory and storage as percentages:

1.

(TodayPanel Lite) icon > Options to open the TodayPanel Lite application. Tap the Tap the Display Memory as list or the Display Storage as list and select the percentage listed. Tap ok. 2. 3. To remove the TodayPanel Lite application from the Today screen:

1. 2. Clear the TodayPanel check box and tap ok. For more options, visit http://www.rhinocode.com to upgrade to TODAYPANEL.PRO. Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Today > Items. Enter text Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Input. Based on your preference, you can use the on-screen keypad or a handwriting recognition feature such as Block Recognizer, Keyboard, Letter Recognizer, or Transcriber to enter text. 1. 2. On the Input method tab, select a text input method and change options as appropriate. 3. You can now go to a program (such as Notes) and start entering text. Tap ok. Text-Input Method Block Recognizer Keyboard Letter Recognizer Transcriber Definition Use a single stroke to write letters, numbers, symbols, and punctuation marks that get converted into typed text. Tap keys on the keyboard to enter text. Write individual letters, numbers, and punctuation marks that are converted into typed text. Write in cursive, print, or mixed handwriting (consisting of both cursive and print), and convert your writing into typed text. TIP: Change the text-input method from within any program by tapping the Input Selector arrow and tapping an input method. To switch between T9 and multipress mode while entering text, press and hold

* key on the keypad. NOTE: To disable the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel while entering text, press and hold the ok key on the left panel of your HP iPAQ. Enter text 13 Customize your HP iPAQ Device information To get detailed information about your HP iPAQ:

Tap Start > Settings > System > About. The Version tab displays important device information, including the type of processor and the amount of memory installed. The device name is used to identify the HP iPAQ in the following situations:

Synchronizing with a computer Connecting to a network NOTE:

name. To change the device name:

1. 2. If you synchronize multiple devices with the same computer, each device must have a unique Tap Start > Settings > System > About > Device ID. Enter a name for the device. The device name must begin with a letter, consist of letters from A to Z and numbers from 0 to 9, and cannot contain spaces. Enter owner information Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Owner Information. Enter your personal information, such as your name and address, so that the HP iPAQ can be returned to you if it is lost. 1. 2. On the Identification tab, enter your personal information. TIP: You can edit the owner information directly from the Today screen. Change the regional settings The style in which regions, numbers, currency, time, and date are displayed is specified in regional settings. To change the regional settings:

1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > System > Regional Settings > Region. Select a region. The region you select determines the options available on the other tabs. To customize additional settings, tap the appropriate tabs and select the required options. On the Region tab, select the required region display options. On the Number tab, select the required number display options. On the Currency tab, select the required currency display options. On the Time tab, select the required time display options. On the Date tab, select the required date display options. 3. 14 Chapter 5 Learn the basics Adjust the volume You can change the volume for various sounds, such as the sound you hear when you tap program names and menu options. 1.

(Speaker) icon at the top of the screen. Tap 2. Move the system volume slider on the screen using the stylus, 3-Way Thumb-Wheel, or the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel of your HP iPAQ to the required volume level. To mute system sounds, tap Off. 3. TIP: To switch to silent mode, press the Vibrate key on the top of your HP iPAQ. Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Sounds & Notifications. You can also set a specific sound for a specific event. 1. 2. On the Sounds tab, choose how you want to be notified by selecting the appropriate check boxes. 3. On the Notifications tab, in the Event list, tap an event name and choose how you want to be notified by selecting the appropriate check boxes. You can choose from several options, such as a special sound, a message, or a flashing light. NOTE: Turning off sounds and the LED notification helps conserve battery power. Change the power management settings 1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > System > Power. Tap Advanced and select the length of time the HP iPAQ stays on when using battery power or AC power. Dim or adjust the brightness of the backlight Tap Start > Settings > System > Backlight. Tap Battery power or External Power. Select the backlight options of your choice. You can set the backlight to dim after a specified amount of time has elapsed. 1. 2. 3. You can also increase or decrease the brightness of the backlight. 1. You can also change the brightness by tapping Start > Settings > System > Backlight >

Brightness. 2. Move the slider on the Backlight screen up or down to set the required level of brightness. NOTE: You can also change the brightness setting from the Today screen by tapping the

(Backlight) icon. TIP: You can also use the 3-Way Thumb-Wheel or the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel to move the slider. Customize your HP iPAQ 15 Install and remove programs To install programs on your HP iPAQ:

1. Use the mini-USB synchronization cable to connect your HP iPAQ to your computer. 2. 3. Check the screen of your HP iPAQ to see if any further steps are necessary to complete the Follow the instructions in the Installation Wizard provided with the program you want to install. program installation. Tap Start > Settings > System > Remove Programs. Select the check box for the program(s) you want to remove, and then tap Remove. To remove programs from your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. NOTE: By removing a program from your HP iPAQ, you might increase available memory on the device. You can also remove the unused programs from your device to increase the available memory. If programs are lost from your HP iPAQ for any reason, most of them can be re-installed using any synchronization software. On your computer, click Options > Add/Remove Programs > check the program to be added > click OK. Open and close programs You do not need to exit a program to open another or to conserve memory. The system manages memory automatically. To open a program, tap Start, and then tap the program you want from the list. If you do not see the program you want, tap Start > Programs. In most cases, programs automatically stop to free required memory. However, you can choose to close programs manually. 1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > System > Memory > Running Programs. In the Running Programs list, tap the program you want to close, and then tap Stop. Set alarms and clocks To set alarm on your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Tap Start > Settings > System > Clock & Alarms > Alarms. Tap <Description> to enter a name for the alarm. Tap the day of the week for the alarm. You can select multiple days by tapping each required day. Tap the Time tab and set the time for the alarm.

(Alarm) icon to specify the type of alarm. You can choose single sound or a repeating Tap sound. If you choose to play a sound, tap the list next to the Play sound check box, and then tap the sound you want to set. 6. To set time on your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > System > Clock & Alarms > Time. Select Home to set the time zone, local time, and date when you are in your home country. Select Visiting to set these options while traveling. 16 Chapter 5 Learn the basics Shortcut menus A shortcut menu is displayed when you tap and hold an item. This menu displays the most common commands for a specific item. For example, you can delete an appointment or send a text message to a contact by using commands on a shortcut menu. When the shortcut menu displays, tap the action you want to perform. To close a shortcut menu without performing an action, tap anywhere outside the menu. Display the clock in title bar When viewing certain programs, the clock might not be displayed in the title bar. To display the clock in the title bar of all programs:

1. 2. On the More tab, tap to select the Display the clock on the title bar in all programs check box. Tap Start > Settings > System > Clock & Alarms. Create and assign a category In the Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks programs, you can use categories to organize and group your appointments, contacts, and tasks. 1. 2. Do one of the following:

From the list, select an existing item or create a new one. For an existing item in Calendar, open the appointment and tap Menu > Edit > Categories. For an existing item in Tasks, open the task and tap Edit > Categories. For an existing item in Contacts, open the contact and tap Menu > Edit > Categories. NOTE: To assign a category to a contact, the contact should be saved on the phone memory. For a new item in Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks, select Categories. Select the required check box (Business, Holiday, Personal, or Seasonal) and tap ok to assign the category. Tap ok to return to the appointment, task, or contact. 4. NOTE: To create a new category, tap New and assign a name to the category for a contact, task, or an appointment. The new category is assigned automatically to the item. 3. Adjust the speed for scrolling through items in a list To change the speed at which scrolling occurs:

1. 2. Under Delay before first repeat, move the slider to reduce or increase the time that elapses before Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Buttons > Up/Down Control. scrolling begins. 3. Under Repeat rate, move the slider to change the time it takes to scroll from one item to the next. View the Operating System (OS) information Tap Start > Settings > System > About. View the Operating System (OS) information 17 The OS version gets displayed on the screen. Lock and unlock your HP iPAQ

(Answer/Send) key on the keyboard. Press Tap Menu > Options To lock the phone:

1. 2. 3. On the Phone screen, select the Require PIN when phone is used check box. 4. 5. 6. Reenter the new PIN for confirmation and tap Enter for verification. NOTE: You can also access the Phone screen by tapping Start > Settings > Personal > Phone. Tap Change PIN. Enter a Personal Identification Number (PIN) and tap Enter. Enter the PIN to access your device. Press Tap Menu > Options. To unlock the phone:

1. 2. 3. 4. Clear the Require PIN when phone is used check box and tap ok. NOTE: You can place an emergency call at anytime, without entering the PIN.

(Answer/Send) key on the keyboard. Battery saving tips You can adjust the settings on your HP iPAQ to fit your individual needs and to help your battery last as long as possible between charges. Here are some recommendations to conserve battery life:

Sounds Every time you are notified of an event, battery power is consumed. Tap Start >

Settings > Personal > Sounds & Notifications to turn off any unnecessary notifications. Auto Turn Off the Backlight Tap Start > Settings > System > Backlight. Specify a short amount of wait before turning off the backlight. On the Battery Power tab, set Turn off backlight if device is not used for to 10 seconds. Turn off Bluetooth and WLAN Always turn off Bluetooth and WLAN when not in use. HP also offers a variety of accessories to keep your HP iPAQ charged when you are out of the office for extended time periods. These include the mini-USB synchronization cable and travel adapter. Use original HP batteries and chargers to charge your HP iPAQ. To check the battery power, tap Start > Settings > System > Power. NOTE:

WARNING! Removing the battery from your HP iPAQ before turning it off might corrupt data present on your HP iPAQ. In case of a battery drain out, you will loose any unsaved data on your iPAQ. 18 Chapter 5 Learn the basics 6 Use your Business Navigator Use the keypad Smart-Touch Navigation wheel Use the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel to navigate through on-screen menus, play songs, change settings, and view information. Move your finger lightly around the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel to scroll through a list. To disable Smart-Touch Navigation wheel:

1. 2. NOTE: To disable the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel , press and hold the ok key on the left panel of Tap Start > Settings > System > Keyboard. Select the Disable Smart Wheel function check box and tap ok. your HP iPAQ. Once you disable the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel, the displays on the top of the screen. To enable the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel, press and hold the ok key on the left panel of your HP iPAQ.

(Wheel Lock) icon Answer/Send key Press the

(Answer/Send) key to access the Dialer screen as well as make and receive calls. End key Press the

(End) key to end a call and quit the Dialer screen. Enter key Press the the next line while entering text by pressing the

(Enter) key.

(Enter) key to open an application from any screen. You can also make a call or move on Back space key Press the when the cursor is not in the input-field, pressing the key takes you to the previous web page.

(Back space) key to back space and clear text or characters one at a time. When browsing, Softkeys Press the left softkey to open the HP iPAQ Shortcuts application and the right softkey to open the Messaging application. 3-Way Thumb-Wheel Use the 3-Way Thumb-Wheel to navigate through on-screen menus, play songs, change settings, and view information. Press the 3-Way Thumb-Wheel to select an application. You can also use the 3-Way Thumb-Wheel to increase or decrease the speaker volume during a call by moving it up and down. Use the keypad 19 Call features Make a call Press the

(Answer/Send) key. 1. 2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the number you want to call. 3. Tap Talk. TIP: You can also make a call by dialing the numbers using the keypad, and then pressing the

(Enter) key. Answer a call

(Answer/Send) key. To answer a call, press the When you receive a call, you can answer or ignore the call. When the phone stops ringing, the caller might be sent to Voice Mail, depending on the settings provided by your mobile phone service provider. To ignore the call, tap Ignore on the on-screen keypad or press the NOTE: To switch to silent mode during a incoming call, press the Vibrate key on the top of your HP iPAQ.

(End) key. Call waiting

(Answer/Send) key. Press the Tap Menu > Options > Services. Tap Call Waiting > Get Settings Use Call Waiting to be notified of incoming calls when you are on another call. To turn on Call Waiting:

1. 2. 3. 4. Under When calls are waiting, tap Notify me. To use Call Waiting to answer an incoming call during a phone conversation:

1. 2. Press the Press the answer the call. Tap Swap to switch between the calls. 3.

(Answer/Send) key to move the current phone call to call waiting.

(Answer/Send) key to answer the incoming call or tap Ignore if you do not want to Redial a number To redial the last number, press the

(Answer/Send) key twice. Call a contact You can call a number stored in the contact list. As you enter a contact's name, the HP iPAQ searches the Contacts, Call History, Speed Dial lists, and the SIM card to find a matching name and number. 20 Chapter 6 Use your Business Navigator Make a call from the Today screen To make calls from the Today screen:

1. Use the keyboard to enter the contact name. 2. 3. In case there is more than one contact with the same name, scroll to select the required contact. Press the

(Answer/Send) key to make the call. Make a call from the contacts You can select a person's name from your contact's list and press the

(Answer/Send) key to place the call. If a contact has more than one phone number, such as Work, Home, and Fax, do the following:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Contacts. Scroll to the contact name. Scroll to the required number and press the TIP:

searches the entire contact's list to display the name. If you have a long list of contacts, enter the first few letters of a contact's name. Your HP iPAQ

(Answer/Send) key to place a call. Change the default number for a contact The Mobile phone number is set as the default number for a contact. 1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Contacts. Scroll to the required contact number. Scroll and select to change the default number. Make emergency calls You can make calls to emergency service numbers, even if you have locked the SIM card and/or the HP iPAQ. Your service provider programs one or more emergency phone numbers, such as 911 or 112, which you can call under any circumstances, even when your HP iPAQ is locked or the SIM card is not inserted. To dial an emergency number:

1. 2. Use the on-screen keypad to dial the local emergency number. 3. NOTE: Emergency numbers vary by country/region. Your HP iPAQ's preprogrammed emergency number(s) might not work in all locations, and sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed due to network, environmental, or interference issues.

(Answer/Send) key to place the call.

(Answer/Send) key. Press the Press the Make calls using speed dials You can dial phone numbers quickly by assigning speed dial numbers. You can choose speed dial entries from 2-99. The speed dial entry 1 is often reserved to set up or dial your Voice Mail after the initial setup. NOTE: The Speed Dial feature is available only for phone numbers stored in the contact's list. Call features 21 Select a speed dial number from 2-99 in the Location box and tap ok. To create a speed dial shortcut:

(Answer/Send) key > Speed Dial. 1. Press the 2. Scroll to the required contact and tap the contact. 3. On the screen, tap Menu > Add to Speed Dial 4. NOTE: You can also assign speed dial by tapping Start > Contacts, select a contact and tap Menu > Add to Speed Dial TIP: You can also assign speed dial numbers to Web addresses and e-mail addresses that are stored in the Contacts on your HP iPAQ. To make a speed dial call:

1. 2. On the screen keypad, tap and hold the number you assigned as a speed dial entry. For two-digit

(Answer/Send) key. Press the speed dial numbers, press the first digit and press and hold the second digit of the number. Voice mail Press the 1. 2. On the screen keypad, tap and hold 1 to automatically call Voice Mail.

(Answer/Send) key. NOTE: You might need to set up the Voice Mail shortcut. Handsfree function You can turn the speaker on during a call to use the handsfree function. On the screen, tap Speaker On to turn the earpiece off. Monitor phone usage Call history stores the duration of your last call, the total number of calls made and received, calls by type, and a lifetime counter. You can use call history to keep track of your calling patterns, to help you choose a calling plan, or estimate your monthly billing. 1. 2. Tap Start > Phone > Call History. Tap the icon next to the required number to view the call details. Make data calls Use connections settings to set up General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), dial-up, Virtual Private Network (VPN), proxy, and WLAN connections to connect to the Internet or your corporate network. With a data connection, you can browse the Web, download e-mail, or synchronize with the server without using wires. NOTE: Your HP iPAQ has already been configured to allow you to browse and chat. Contact your service provider for information on mobile Internet plans, configuring e-mail or wireless synchronizing with the server. 22 Chapter 6 Use your Business Navigator Mute a call You can mute the microphone during an active call. On making a call the other party will not be able to hear anything you say, but you can still hear the other party. To mute the microphone during a call:

Tap Mute on the Dialer screen. Put a call on hold During a call, you can put the call on hold and dial another number or answer an incoming call. If you have more than one call on the line, you can switch between calls. To put a call on hold, tap Hold. To switch between calls, tap Swap. Make a conference call Tap Talk. Press the

(Answer/Send) key. To make a conference call:

1. 2. On the screen keypad, dial the required number. 3. 4. Once you are connected, tap Hold. 5. Dial the second number, and then tap Talk. 6. Once you are connected, tap Menu > Conference. NOTE: To add more parties to the conference call, dial each number, connect, and then tap Menu >

Conference. Make a call from a hyperlink phone number Use a hyperlinked phone number to quickly dial a phone number from an e-mail or text message. A hyperlinked phone number is underlined in the same manner as a Web site address. From an e-mail or text message containing a hyperlinked phone number:

1. 2. Tap the phone number. Tap Call to dial the number. Dial international numbers To make an international call, enter a country code before the phone number. 1. On the screen, tap and hold 0 until the plus (+) sign displays. 2. NOTE: You can also insert a plus (+) sign into a contact's phone number for quick dialing. Enter the country code and phone number. Call features 23 Call history Manage calls using call history Call history provides the time and duration of all incoming, outgoing, and missed calls, a summary of total calls, and has easy access to notes taken during a call. On the screen tap Start > Phone > Call History to view the history of all dialed and received calls. Tap Menu > Filter and select a different view to change the call history view. NOTE: Tap Menu > Call Timers to view call durations. The All Calls timer cannot be reset. Tap Call History > Menu > Delete All Calls to clear the entire Call History. Make calls using call history Press the Use call history to quickly call someone whom you recently called or someone who recently called you. 1. 2. On the screen keypad tap Call History. 3. Tap the required number to place a call.

(Answer/Send) key. View call details 1. On the screen, tap Call History. 2. The date and timestamp, as well as the duration of the call, are displayed. Tap the phone number of the contact to view the details. Voice commands Use voice commands to look up contacts, dial a contact by name, get calendar information, play and control your music, as well as launch applications on your HP iPAQ. Press the HP Voice Commander key to launch the HP Voice Commander application. Wait for the audio cue to say Say command, and then begin saying a command into the microphone. NOTE: You can also launch the HP Voice Commander by pressing the hookswitch on your HP iPAQ headset. To Say Call a contact saved in the contact list Call followed by the name of the contact and home/work/

mobile Find a contact saved in the contact list Find followed by the name of the contact To call numbers not stored in the contact list Digit Dial followed by the digits in the number, Redial to redial the number, and Callback to call the last dialed number Important! The Digit Dial feature might not be available in all countries/regions. To play, pause, and/or resume music Play Music/Pause/Resume To play an existing music file Play followed by the name of the music file 24 Chapter 6 Use your Business Navigator To play the previous or the next song in the playlist Previous/Next To open an application View appointments Start followed by the application name

<Today's/Tomorrow's/This Week's appointments> to list the appointments for the day, next day, or the present week Read messages, e-mails, check Call History Read<SMS/E-mail>/Call history View time View the different set of commands What time is it?

What can I say?

To close HP Voice Commander application Goodbye To compose an e-mail To compose an audio e-mail Compose E-mail To (Contact) Compose Audio E-mail To (Contact) to start recording an audio message To change profiles Set followed by the name of the profile to set the profile To dial a number using speed dial Speed Dial followed by the digit assigned to the number To record an audio note To see all reminders To schedule a call Start Recording to open the voice recorder and start recording Reminder Schedule A Call To (Contact) to call a contact Check connection and signal strength When you slide your SIM card into your HP iPAQ, your unit automatically connects to your mobile phone service provider's network. The the vertical bars, the better the connection.

(Signal strength) icon indicates that you are connected. The more Change the SIM PIN

(Answer/Send) key. Press the Tap Menu > Options. For security purposes, the SIM PIN protects your HP iPAQ against unauthorized access. You can assign a password to protect your device and information. Your first PIN comes from your wireless service provider. 1. 2. 3. Under Phone, tap Change PIN. 4. 5. 6. 7. To enter a PIN before you make calls, check Require PIN when phone is used. NOTE: Emergency calls can be placed at any time, without entering a PIN. Enter your current PIN. Tap Enter. Enter and confirm your new PIN. Tap ok. Check connection and signal strength 25 Change service settings Change phone service settings Once your phone service is set up through your mobile phone service provider, you can change service settings on your HP iPAQ. For example, you might want to block certain types of incoming and/or outgoing calls, forward incoming calls to a different phone number, be notified of incoming calls when you are already in a phone session, or let others know your identity when making calls. To change phone service settings:

1. 2. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Services. 3. 4. Make appropriate changes and tap ok. Tap the service you want to change, and then tap Get Settings.

(Answer/Send) key. Press the Forward calls 1. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Services. 2. 3. 4. You can set numbers for the following:

Tap Call Forwarding > Get Settings. Select the Forward all incoming phone calls check box. Enter the phone number that is to receive the forwarded calls. No answer phone cannot be answered. Unavailable phone is off. Busy line is busy. Configure caller ID 1. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Services. 2. 3. 4. To prevent your identity from being displayed to others, tap No one. Tap Caller ID > Get Settings. Tap Everyone. Tap ok. Block calls 1. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Services. 2. 3. Tap Call Barring > Get Settings. Select the type of calls you want to block. Set up voice mail or text messaging center number To use voice mail or send text messages (SMS), enter the correct voice mail or text message phone number in phone settings. 26 Chapter 6 Use your Business Navigator NOTE: Sending text messages is not included in all network service plans. Ask your mobile service provider if your plan includes this service. 1. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Services. 2. 3. 4. If you do not know the correct voice mail or text message phone numbers, contact your mobile phone service provider. Tap Voice Mail and Text Messages > Get Settings. Enter the voice mail or text message center number in the appropriate box. Tap ok. Limit calls to specific area codes or phone numbers Placeholder- more information required. Change network settings Change phone network settings In phone network settings, you can:

View available wireless phone networks. Determine the order in which your phone accesses other phone networks (if the current one is unavailable). Specify whether you want to change networks manually or automatically. To change network settings:

1. 2. NOTE: The current phone network your HP iPAQ is using is listed at the top of the screen and remains active until you change it, lose your signal, or change your SIM. Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Phone > Network. Select the network setting options you want to change. View available phone networks To view all mobile phone networks available to you:

1. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Network. 2. 3. 4. In the Network selection list, tap Manual. Tap Find Network to display all of the available mobile phone networks. Tap ok. Set preferred networks You can set preferred phone networks in the order you want your HP iPAQ to access them. For example, if your first preferred network is unavailable, your HP iPAQ tries to access your second preferred phone network. Change network settings 27 To assign network preferences:

1. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Network. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Tap Set Networks and select your preferred networks. To set the network preference order, tap Move Up or Move Down. Tap ok. In the Network screen, tap the Network selection list. Tap Automatic. Manually selecting a phone Network Sometimes you might want to control costs by knowing when connectivity for your current, selected network is unavailable. To manually select a network:

1. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Network. 2. 3. 4. In the Network selection list, tap Manual. Select the network you want to use and then tap ok. If your current network is unavailable, tap Select, and then manually select a different network. Change the ring tone and ring type Press the Change the ring tone and type to select a different sound to notify you of incoming calls. To change ring tone and ring type:

1. 2. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Phone. 3. 4. Tap the Ring type or Ring tone list. Select the sound you want to use.

(Answer/Send) key. Take notes during a call Enter your text. To create a note during a call:

1. On the screen keypad, tap Menu > Create Note. 2. To access a note you created during a call:

1. 2. 3. A note created during a call can also be accessed from the Notes application. The note title is the phone number you were connected to when writing the note. Tap Phone > Call History on the screen. Tap and hold the name or number for the phone call entry containing the note. Tap View Note. 28 Chapter 6 Use your Business Navigator Select a frequency band automatically Your HP iPAQ has an integrated GSM/GPRS/EDGE feature that supports four different frequency bands (850/900/1800/1900) for international roaming. When traveling between countries and/or wireless network operators, this feature automatically changes the connection settings for frequency bands if the home band is unavailable. This feature is the default setting on the HP iPAQ. To avoid problems once you are out of the country, follow these tips before you leave:

Visit your mobile phone service provider's Web site to see if their service is available where you are traveling. Verify if your mobile phone account is set up for international roaming and if additional charges apply. Copy a contact from a SIM to a device When using the SIM card in multiple devices, you can copy contacts from the SIM to the new device. 1. 2. 3. 4. Tap Start > Contacts. Tap Menu > Copy to Memory. Tap OK to copy the contacts or Cancel to go back to the previous screen. Tap Start > Contacts and search for the added contacts to verify if you copied the contacts to your HP iPAQ. Add Tele-typewriter (TTY) functionality Add TTY functionality for people who are deaf or hard-of-hearing HP iPAQ products support Tele-typewriter (TTY) functionality, which allows people who are deaf or with hearing limitations to communicate using existing telephony infrastructure, including cell phones. To achieve this, separately purchased TTY devices must be connected to the telephones on both ends of a telephone call session, and the HP iPAQ must be configured for TTY use. The sending TTY device generates a distinct audio tone for every supported character, and these tones are decoded and converted back into text on the receiving TTY device. Due to the use of audio compression codecs in modern digital cell phones, these TTY audio tones might be unintentionally distorted while being transmitted through cell phones. Therefore, in order for TTY devices to continue to work in cellular networks, the cell phone must be set into a mode that optimizes the compression codec to handle TTY tones instead of the human voice. To use TTY with the HP iPAQ, an optional TTY audio adapter must be plugged into the HP iPAQ earbud jack (also called the earbud connector). This TTY audio adapter converts the pin-out of the earbud jack, which is designed for a wired earbud and stereo headphones, to the pin-out required by most TTY devices. To purchase the TTY audio adapter (part number: FA709BAC3), visit http://www.hp.com >

Handhelds & Calculators > Options and Accessories. NOTE: Because the HP iPAQ does not support internal Cellular Text Telephone Modem (CTM) conversion, the TTY device you use must contain CTM conversion, or you must use an external CTM adapter between the HP iPAQ and the TTY device. For information on connecting TTY devices or CTM adapters to the HP iPAQ, refer to the TTY device or CTM adapter manufacturers documentation. Select a frequency band automatically 29 HP is committed to developing products, services and information that are accessible to everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations. For more information, visit http://www.hp.com/accessibility. Enable TTY support NOTE: Before enabling TTY (Tele-typewriter) support on the HP iPAQ, connect a 2.5 mm connector into the earbud jack or the setting reverts back to disabled. For example, plug in the optional TTY audio adapter into the earbud jack first, as described below. Once you enable TTY support, you can remove the 2.5 mm connector and TTY remains enabled on the HP iPAQ until you disable it. 1. Connect the TTY device to the TTY audio adapter. 2. Connect the TTY audio adapter to the earbud jack (earbud connector) on the bottom of the HP iPAQ. Press the Answer/Send key on the front of the HP iPAQ to launch the screen keypad. Tap Menu > Options > TTY. Tap On. 3. 4. 5. 6. Tap ok. The mode. icon displays in the Navigation bar when it is enabled. Now you are in TTY audio 7. Connect the optional TTY device cable to the TTY audio adapter as stated in the TTY manufacturers documentation. NOTE: Do not activate TTY audio mode while a telephone call is already in progress. Make a phone call using the TTY enabled HP iPAQ Press the 1. 2. Dial the phone number of the person you are trying to reach who also has a Tele-typewriter (TTY)

(Answer/Send) key. device connected to his phone. If you are asked if you want to turn on the phone, tap Yes. NOTE:

Install a SIM card before making your first phone call. 3. When the phone call is answered, start typing on the TTY keyboard. The letters typed into the TTY device are turned into electrical signals that travel over regular telephone lines. When the signals reach their destination (another TTY device), they are converted back into letters that appear on a display screen, are printed out on paper, or both. When you are finished typing your phone conversation, the person on the other end of the line might begin typing their answers or comments to you. To end the phone call, press and hold the 4. NOTE:

decrease. Also, if you make a phone call using a Bluetooth headset while in TTY mode and insert a plug into the headphone jack, TTY audio mode activates thereby decreasing the quality of voice calls. If a normal headset is connected while TTY support is enabled, the audio quality might

(End) key. Disable TTY support 1. 2. Press the Tap Menu > Options > TTY.

(Answer/Send) key to launch the screen keypad. 30 Chapter 6 Use your Business Navigator Tap Off. Tap ok. 3. 4. NOTE:

HP recommends disabling TTY support when the HP iPAQ is not being used for TTY to allow the special network resources to be used by others. If you plan to use the HP iPAQ in both normal and Tele-typewriter (TTY) audio mode, Voice notes Create voice votes To create a stand-alone recording (voice note) or add a recording to a note:

1. 2. Do one of the following:

Tap Start > Programs > Notes. To create a stand-alone recording, record from the note list. To add a recording to a note, create or open a note. NOTE:

If the Recording toolbar does not appear, tap Menu > View Recording Toolbar. 3.

(Record) button. Tap the Speak into the microphone located at the bottom of the unit. 4. 5. When you have finished recording the note, tap the NOTE:

stand-alone recording, an displays in the note list. Also, you can create a voice note in HP Photosmart Mobile and attach the note to a picture. If you are recording in an open note, an icon displays in the note. If you are creating a

(Stop) button on the recording toolbar. Delete voice notes Tap Start > Programs > Notes. From the note list, tap and hold the note. Tap Delete. To delete a stand-alone recording voice note:

1. 2. 3. To delete a recording within a note:

1. 2. Open a note. 3. 4. Tap and hold the Tap Clear. Tap Start > Programs > Notes.

(Voice Note) icon. Listen to voice notes 1. 2. Tap Start > Programs > Notes. Tap the

(Recorded voice note) icon to hear the note. Voice notes 31 Rename voice notes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Tap Start > Programs > Notes. Tap and hold the note to rename. Tap Rename/Move. Enter the new name in the Name box. Tap ok. Configure channels Enable this feature to receive real-time news and information such as traffic news and weather reports. Check with your mobile phone service provider for availability in your area. To configure the phone broadcast channels:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. HSDPA Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Phone > More. Select the Cell Broadcast check box. Tap Setting Tap Add, and then enter the channel name and number. Tap ok. High Speed Download Packet Access (HSDPA) is an enhancement of Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) which is based on 3G technology, and offers better compression and codecs.Your HP iPAQ supports HSDPA 3.6 to 7.2 mbps that uses WCDMA for high speed downloads. HP iPAQ also supports WCDMA over three different frequency bands (850/1900/2100). When WCDMA or HSDPA is available, the device uses the technology and reverts back to GSM/GPRS/EDGE if WCDMA or HSDPA is unavailable. Differences between GSM and GPRS/EDGE/WCDMA/3G technology GSM technology is typically used for voice calls and text messaging, whereas GPRS/EDGE/WCDMA/

3G technology provides a connection to the Mobile Phone Network that can be used for Web browsing, Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS), or accessing your corporate network. NOTE: Using GPRS/EDGE/WCDMA/3G data services are typically an additional charge to your standard mobile phone service. Check with your mobile phone service provider for data services and cost. 32 Chapter 6 Use your Business Navigator 7 Camera Use the camera Use the built-in digital camera on your HP iPAQ to capture and view photos. Capture photos Press the Camera key or tap Start > Programs > Camera. You can capture photos and store them in your HP iPAQ or storage card. 1. 2. Use the 3-Way Thumbwheel key to zoom in or zoom out. 3. 4. To decrease or increase brightness, move the horizontal slider at the bottom of the screen. Press the Camera key to capture a photo and automatically save it in File Explorer > My Documents > My Pictures. NOTE: Tap the

(Flash) button to enable flash while taking pictures. View photos Tap Start > Programs > Photosmart Mobile. To view photos captured on your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. Navigate to a required folder. 3. Tap the folder to open it and tap the required photo. Change camera settings Change brightness settings 1. 2. Tap Start > Programs > Camera. Tap the

(Settings) button. 3. On the Basic tab, select Brightness from the White Balance list. 4. You can adjust the brightness within a range of -10000 to +10000. Select the required value for brightness from the adjacent list and tap ok. Change resolution settings 1. 2. Tap Start > Programs > Camera. Tap the

(Settings) button. 3. On the Photo tab, select the required settings from the Resolution list. 4. Make the necessary changes and tap ok. Use the camera 33 The Resolution settings can be changed to:

QVGA 320 X 240 VGA 640 X 480 1M 1280 X 960 1.3M 1280 X 1024 2M 1600 X 1200 3M 2048 X 1536 NOTE: The larger the resolution you choose, the more the storage space required and it might take longer to send such photos by Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS), e-mail, or Bluetooth. Change mode settings 1. 2. Tap Start > Programs > Camera. Tap the

(Settings) button. 3. On the Photo tab, select the required setting from the Capture mode list. 4. Make the necessary changes and tap ok. Mode settings can be changed to:

Normal Set this default mode when you capture photos. Timer Set the self-timer to the time duration after which the camera captures photo on pressing the Camera key. Burst Set the maximum number of photos that can be taken at a time. Frame Set the type of frame. Panorama horizontal Set to panorama horizontal to capture vast landscapes, city skylines, and other landscapes. Panorama vertical Placeholder- more information required. NOTE: You can also tap the

(Frame) button to change the frame type. Video recorder Record videos Tap Start > Programs > Camera. You can use the built-in camcorder on your HP iPAQ to create short videos and share them with your friends and family. 1. 2. Tap Press the Camera key to start recording. Press the Camera key again to stop recording.

(Video) button to go into the video mode. 3. 34 Chapter 7 Camera Configure video format Tap Start > Programs > Camera, and then tap the On the Video tab, change one of the following:

Select resolution from the Resolution list. You can change the settings to:

(Settings) button. QCIF(176 X 144) QVGA(320 X 240) NOTE: Select the Record voice check box to record voice while recording videos. Transfer images Use GPRS When the phone radio is turned on for the first time, the HP iPAQ DataConnect application detects the mobile phone service provider and automatically populates the MMS settings on the HP iPAQ. To transfer pictures using MMS:

1. 2. 3. 4. Tap Start > Messaging > MMS. Tap Menu > New. Tap the picture or the video you want to attach. Tap Send. Use Bluetooth You can do the following to transfer images from your HP iPAQ to other devices:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Programs > Photosmart Mobile. Scroll and select a picture. Tap Menu > Beam picture Select the device and tap Tap to send. NOTE: You should have the Bluetooth connection on to transfer images. Transfer images 35

To configure the data settings:

1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > HP iPAQ DataConnect. Select a country and operator, and then tap Select to configure the network settings for the selected operator. The data settings will be retrieved each time you try to connect to the Internet using GPRS. It is not recommended to manually configure using HP iPAQ DataConnect. 3. WARNING!

HP Asset Viewer Using the HP Asset Viewer application, you can view information about the system, integrated modules, and attached accessories. To access HP Asset Viewer:

1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > System > HP Asset Viewer. To view additional system information, tap the appropriate tabs. The Identify tab displays the serial number and the user information. The Memory tab displays the iPAQ device memory information. The Version tab displays the iPAQ device Version information The Display tab displays the iPAQ device display panel information. The System tab displays the iPAQ device system information. The Camera tab displays the iPAQ device Camera information. The Bluetooth tab displays the iPAQ device Bluetooth information. The WLAN tab displays the iPAQ device WLAN information. The GSM tab displays the iPAQ device GSM information. The GPS tab displays the iPAQ device GPS information. Certificate Enroller Certificate Enroller is an enhanced security feature for retrieving and registering new certificates. This application-initiated enrollment allows you to request a user certificate from a certificate server. NOTE: Certificate Enroller picks up certificate types from Active Directory as well as from the device data store. You must enter a server name for retrieving the certificate, and if required, a valid username and password. To access Certificate Enroller:

1. 2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter server name, user name, and password. Tap ok to save the Tap Start > Settings > System > HP CertEnroller. settings. NOTE: Tap Retrieve to initiate the transaction of downloading the certificate from the server. 3. Once the certificate is retrieved, tap Menu > Cancel to exit. NOTE: Tap Menu > About to view a brief description of the application, application name, version number, and copyright statement. HP applications 81 Manage certificates 1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > System > Certificates. Select a certificate tab. The Personal tab displays your personal certificates. The Intermediate tab displays the intermediate certification authorities. The Root tab displays the root certification authorities. NOTE: To view the certificate details, tap the required certificate on each tab. HP iPAQ Tips Use HP iPAQ Tips to perform operations on your HP iPAQ in a quick and efficient manner. A tip is displayed on your screen every time you turn on your HP iPAQ. Tap Menu > Next to display the next tip. To quit the application, tap Dismiss. You can also access HP iPAQ Tips by tapping Start >

Programs > HP Help and Support > HP iPAQ Quick Tips. TIP: You can also access the HP iPAQ Tips application by tapping Start > Programs > HP iPAQ Tips. HP Voice Commander Use HP Voice Commander application to look up contacts, dial a contact by name, get calendar information, play and control your music, as well as launch applications on your HP iPAQ. For more information refer Voice commands on page 24. TIP: You can also access the HP Voice Commander application by tapping Start > Programs. HP iPAQ Mobile Broadband Connect Use HP iPAQ Mobile Broadband Connect to connect your computer to the Internet using your GPRS enabled iPAQ. You need to install the HP iPAQ Mobile Broadband Connect application, which is available on the Getting Started CD. NOTE: Make sure you have installed ActiveSync 4.5 for Windows XP OS or WMDC 6.1 for Windows Vista OS on your computer before using this application. To connect your computer to the Internet using your HP iPAQ:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to your computer using the mini-USB synchronization cable. 2. The HP iPAQ Mobile Broadband Connect icon in the system tray on your computer indicating that the iPAQ has established a connection with the computer. 3. Double click on the HP iPAQ Mobile Broadband Connect icon in the system tray on your computer. Select a valid GPRS connection from the connection list on your HP iPAQ and tap Next to move to DataModem state. You can then access the Internet using the Internet browser on your computer. 4. 5. 82 Chapter 18 Applications HP Enterprise Mobility Agent (mProveDM) Use the HP Enterprise Mobility Agent to help you easily configure and manage your HP iPAQ. Visit http://redirect.hp.com/svs/rdr to download and install the HP Enterprise Mobility Agent. After you install the install different applications from the Internet on your HP iPAQ. This application requires WLAN connection with access to internet. HP Enterprise Mobility Agent, the application will configure, download, and HP iPAQ File Store You can install programs and save files to the iPAQ File Store folder, which can be accessed from the File Explorer on your HP iPAQ. Programs and files stored on your iPAQ File Store folder are not deleted even if you perform a full reset on your HP iPAQ. 1. Copy the files to be saved to the iPAQ File Store folder. 2. 3. Tap Start > Programs > File Explorer > iPAQ File Store. Tap Edit > Paste. CAUTION:

save new files or modify existing files in the hp folder. iPAQ File Store may contain a special folder called hp to store system files. Do not NOTE: Before saving files to the iPAQ File Store folder, it is a good idea to determine how much memory is available in the folder. To view the amount of memory, tap Start > Settings > System >

Memory > Storage Card, and then select iPAQ File Store from the list. HP PrintSmart Mobile Use HP PrintSmart Mobile to print information from your HP iPAQ mobile device to a compatible printer while away from the office and whenever you need it. HP PrintSmart Mobile application provides printing support over Bluetooth, IR, and Wi-Fi network. It also provides printing support for various document formats including .doc, .xls, .jpg, .bmp, and .html. You can also configure various printers and manage print jobs. For more information, refer the Getting Started CD. HP Keyguard The HP Keyguard application deactivates your iPAQ touch screen and keys to prevent accidental activation of the device or any of its functions. To enable the HP Keyguard application, tap Start > Settings > Buttons > Lock > Enable Keyguard >

ok. NOTE: Once the device enters standby mode, the keyguard is automatically activated. To disable the HP Keyguard application, clear the Enable Keyguard check box and tap ok. The buttons on the device do not perform their functions and the touch screen is inactive until you complete the sequence to unlock the keys. To unlock this application, follow the deactivation sequence as described on the screen. NOTE: When you receive a call, the keyguard remains active and allows you to answer the call. HP applications 83 NOTE: To dial an emergency number when the keyguard is active, enter the emergency number using the keypad and press the

(Answer/Send) key. HP SecureConnect Mobile Use HP SecureConnect Mobile to automatically connect your HP iPAQ to Wi-Fi hotspots or home and office networks. You need to follow an online registration process to begin using this application. All communications carried out using HP SecureConnect Mobile supports Cisco Compatible Extensions v1, v2, v3, and v4 (CCX) and thus gives enhanced security, mobility, quality of service, and network management. HP iPAQ Ring Tone Manager With HP iPAQ Ring Tone Manager application, you can add and remove ring tones on your HP iPAQ. To add a ring tone:

1. 2. On the iPAQ Ring Tones screen, under Select Ring Tones to add to your device, all *.wav, Tap Start > Settings > System > RingTones > Add.

*.mid, and *.mp3 files stored on the device are displayed. Select the required ring tones, and tap Add. 3.

(Play) button. Use the To play the newly added ring tones, tap the tone being played. To add a ring tone:

1. 2. On the iPAQ Ring Tones screen, under Select Ring Tones to be removed from your device Tap Start > Settings > System > RingTones > Remove.

(Stop) button, to stop the ring list, select the required ring tones,. Tap Remove. 3. NOTE: You can use the HP iPAQ Ring Tone Manager application only to add and remove ring tones. This application lacks the ability to assign any file as a current ring tone. HP iPAQ Audio Applet Tap Start > Settings > System > Audio Control > Equalizer. Select the Enable Headphone Equalizer check box to enable the equalizer controls. From the Mode list, select the required mode. The HP iPAQ Audio Applet allows you to set, adjust, and save settings for the equalizer bands. Saving the equalizer settings helps in their easy retrieval. Additionally, you can define a new mode with the desired equalizer band values. To adjust the Headphone Equalizer settings:

1. 2. 3. NOTE: The equalizer settings are preset and unalterable for the predefined modes: Flat, Classical, Rock, Jazz, Dance, and Vocal. To create a new mode:

1. 2. Tap New on the Headphone Equalizer screen. In the Mode Name box, enter a desired name for the new mode and tap OK. 84 Chapter 18 Applications NOTE: The new mode name should be different from the predefined mode names. You can modify and delete the new modes. To access the Microphone settings:

1. 2. On the Microphone screen, deselect the Enable AGC check box to activate the microphone Tap Start > Settings > System > Audio Control > Mic. settings. NOTE:

3. Select one of the predefined modes: Quiet, Normal, or Noisy. 4. Use the slider to adjust the set value of each of these modes. If you enable the Automatic Gain Control (AGC), the system handles the gain level. Pocket Internet Explorer (PIE) You can launch the PIE application from the Start menu. This application displays an iPAQ-customized home page with the following icons:

iPAQ software iPAQ Mobile Windows Mobile iPAQ accessories HP shopping Each icon is linked to its respective Web page. Therefore, the appropriate Web page opens up when you tap a desired icon. Remote Desktop Mobile Use the Remote Desktop Mobile to log on to a Windows Terminal Server. This facility allows you to use all programs installed on this server. To connect to a Terminal Server:

1. 2. 3. 4. Tap Options > Display to set the color options, 256 Colors or High Color (16 bit). You can view the Remote desktop display either in the full screen mode or you can choose to fit the remote desktop to your iPAQ screen. Tap Start > Programs > Remote Desktop Mobile. In the Computer box, enter a Terminal Server name or TCP/IP address. Enter your user name, password, and domain in the respective boxes. Tap Connect. Remote Desktop Mobile 85 Tap Options > Sound to set the Remote desktop sound. You can either select to mute the sound, play the sound on the remote computer, or play the sound on your device. Windows Media Player Use Windows Media Player to enjoy your digital media in new ways both at home and on the go. Using Windows Media Player, you can play media audio and video files, and MP3 audio files stored on your phone or memory card. For a complete list of features and more, visit http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmedia. NOTE: Protected files are digital media files that are secured with a license to prevent unauthorized use or playback. Licenses are created and managed by using the DRM technology. Clear the Now Playing List Tap Start > Programs > Windows Media and select Now Playing. The Now Playing playlist displays the currently playing file and any files that are queued up to play next. You can quickly remove all items from the playlist by clearing the Now Playing playlist. 1. If you are on the Library screen, select the Now Playing category to display the Now Playing screen. If you are on the Playback screen, select Now Playing to display the Now Playing screen. 2. On the Now Playing screen, tap Menu > Clear Now Playing. Update a Library In most cases, Windows Media Player Mobile automatically updates your libraries. However, you can manually update a library to ensure that it has links to any new files that you might have recently copied to your HP iPAQ or a removable storage card. 1. 2. On the Library screen, tap Menu > Update Library 3. Wait for the files to be added, and then tap Done. If you are not already on the Library screen, tap Menu > Library Use HP Voice Commander to play media files You can play your media files by using the HP Voice Commander application on your HP iPAQ. 1. 2. Hold your HP iPAQ 10 cm away from your face and say Play Music (Media File Name) to play Press the HP Voice Commander key on your HP iPAQ. the media file. NOTE: The Play Music voice command will only play media files present in a playlist. NOTE: Press the HP Voice Commander key and say Pause Resume Music to pause or resume the media file. MS Office applications Word Mobile You can create and edit documents and templates in Word Mobile. You can also save the documents and templates as .doc, .rtf, .txt, and .dot files. 86 Chapter 18 Applications With Word Mobile, you can:

Edit word documents and templates created on your computer. Open and edit Pocket Word (*.psw) documents NOTE:

If you edit a file, you will need to save it in .doc, .rtf, .txt, or .dot format. To access Word Mobile, tap Start > Office Mobile > Word Mobile. Options available when you tap Menu allow you to:

Create a new document or edit an existing document. Format a document. Check spellings and count words in a document. Save, move, rename, or delete a document. Send a document via e-mail or Bluetooth. Excel Mobile You can create and edit workbooks and templates on your HP iPAQ with Excel Mobile. With Excel Mobile, you can:

View, edit, and create charts and graphics, which can be embedded as objects in a worksheet or placed on a separate worksheet. Enter formulas and functions, and then filter data to see the subset of information you want. Split panes to view different parts of a worksheet at the same time. Freeze the top and left-most panes in a worksheet to keep row and column labels or other data visible as you scroll through a sheet. To access Excel Mobile, tap Start > Office Mobile > Excel Mobile. To access options for organizing and formatting a worksheet, open a worksheet and tap Menu. In addition to Cut, Copy, and Paste, there are options in Menu that allow you to:

Paste cells using Paste Special Clear cell contents and formats applied to cells. Insert new cells, charts, symbols, functions, and define names in a workbook. Set dimensions for rows and columns. Align cells, set font and style for the text, and set cell borders. Create new worksheets and save, rename, or delete existing worksheets. Send a worksheet via e-mail or Bluetooth. PowerPoint Mobile Use PowerPoint Mobile to open and view slide show presentations created on your computer. With PowerPoint Mobile, you can:

Open a presentation from an e-mail message. Download a presentation from a file share or the Internet. Copy a presentation to your HP iPAQ via a storage card. MS Office applications 87 NOTE: Slide shows created in *.ppt or *.pps format with PowerPoint 97 and later can be viewed on your device. PowerPoint features that are not supported on your HP iPAQ include:

Notes: Notes written for slides are not visible. Rearranging or editing slides: PowerPoint Mobile is a viewer only. To access PowerPoint Mobile, tap Start > Office Mobile > PowerPoint Mobile. Options available when you tap Menu allow you to:

Set up a slide show. Rename, move, delete, or create a copy of a presentation. Send a presentation via e-mail or Bluetooth. Games Bubble Breaker The objective of Bubble Breaker is to have balls (more than one) of the same color deleted from the screen. The fewer balls you leave behind, the higher your score will be. To start a new game:

1. 2. 3. 4. NOTE: To recall the balls you deleted, tap Menu > Undo Move. Tap Start > Programs > Games > Bubble Breaker. Tap New Game to start a new game. Tap Menu > Statistics to select a style to display relative entries. Tap Menu > Options to edit the settings for the game. To play a game:

1. 2. 3. 4. Solitaire Tap Start > Programs > Games > Bubble Breaker. Tap New Game to start a new game. Scroll and select a ball which is of the same color as the other balls around. Tap the selected balls twice to delete the balls from the screen. The objective of Solitaire is to use all the cards in the deck to build up four suit stacks in ascending order, beginning with the aces. You win the game when all cards are on the suit stacks. To play a game:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Programs > Games > Solitaire. Tap Menu > New Game to start a new game. Tap and hold the card you want to move and drag it to the card stack to which you want to move the card. 4. Move any aces on the seven stacks to the four card spaces at the top of the screen, and then make any other available plays. 88 Chapter 18 Applications 5. Tap a card twice to move it to the four card stack on the upright corner of the screen if it belongs there. The card that is faced up on the four card stacks is always available for play. 6. When you have made all the available plays, tap Draw to turn over cards. Internet Sharing You can use your HP iPAQ as a wireless modem. The Internet Sharing software on your HP iPAQ guides you during the connection process. Insert a GPRSenabled SIM into your HP iPAQ before setting up Internet Sharing. You might also need to install the software drivers (located on the Getting Started CD) on to your laptop. Before you can begin Internet Sharing, make sure you have a cellular connection. If you do not have an active connection, you will not be able to launch the Internet Sharing application. To connect to a laptop using a USB data connection You might need to install the USB driver before connecting to your computer. If your computer has automatically added your HP iPAQ as a new modem, you can skip the following steps:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using the mini-USB synchronization cable. Your computer might prompt you for the wireless USB modem driver with a New hardware wizard menu screen. Else proceed to To set up a USB modem connection. 2. Click Next on the welcome screen of the Install Wizard. 3. 4. Select the Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended) option. Select Specify a Location and browse to the C:\ drive folder that contains the USB driver. NOTE: Click Next to allow your computer to automatically search and download the USB driver file. 5. Click Finish. 6. After installing the driver, Smartphone USB Modem will be added to the device list in the Device Manager. 7. Next, disconnect your HP iPAQ from the computer. NOTE: 56 K modems are capable of receiving 56 Kbps from a compatible service provider. Actual speeds will vary depending on line conditions. Setting Up a USB modem connection:

1. Make sure that your HP iPAQ is not connected to your computer. 2. 3. 4. 5. Now connect your HP iPAQ to your computer with the mini-USB synchronization cable and tap Tap Start > Programs > Internet Sharing. Scroll and select USB from the PC Connection list. Scroll and select the type of GPRS connection you want to use from the Network Connection list. Connect. Internet Sharing 89 To connect to a laptop using Bluetooth data connection For best results, connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using a mini-USB to establish a synchronization relationship before connecting via Bluetooth. Follow the instructions on your synchronization software help for configuring Bluetooth on your computer. To set up a Bluetooth modem connection:

1. Make sure that your HP iPAQ is not connected to your computer. 2. 3. 4. 5. Make your HP iPAQ visible and detectable. Connect the Bluetooth PAN to your computer and Tap Start > Programs > Internet Sharing. Scroll and select Bluetooth PAN from the PC Connection list. Scroll and select the type of GPRS connection you want to use from the Network Connection list. create a partnership between them. Press Connect after the partnership is established. 6. Internet Explorer Use Internet Explorer Mobile to view and download Web pages as well as browse Web sites through synchronization, or when connected to the Internet. The HP iPAQ DataConnect application detects the network settings and lets you connect to Internet Web sites. To open a link using favorite page:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Internet Explorer to open the Internet Explorer Mobile. Tap Favorites list and tap to open the required link. Tap Menu > Favorites to list all your favorite sites and tap Menu > Add To Favorites to add a new URL in your favorites list. Tap Menu > History to display the history. 4. NOTE: Tap Menu > Tools > Options to change general, memory, and security settings. NOTE: You can send any URL as an e-mail message by tapping Menu > Tools > Send Link You can learn more about Internet Explorer by tapping Start > Help > Contents > Browse the Web. Windows Live Messenger You can use MSN Messenger on your phone to send instant messages. MSN Messenger provides the same chat environment as of the MSN Messenger on your computer. With the MSN Messenger feature, you can:

Send and receive Instant Messages. Change your own status or view the status of others on your list. Invite others for a chat conversation. Block certain contacts from seeing your status or sending you messages. 90 Chapter 18 Applications To use MSN Messenger, you need a Microsoft.NET Passport account unless you already have a Hotmail account. To set up a Microsoft.NET Passport account, go to http://www.passport.net. After you have an account, you can use your HP iPAQ MSN Messenger feature. Sign in and out of messenger Tap Sign in after navigating to a required sign-in status. Enter your information in the Sign-in and Password box. Tap Sign In. Tap Start > Programs > Messenger to open MSN Messenger feature. To sign into the Messenger:

1. 2. To sign out of the Messenger:

Tap Menu > Sign Out to sign-out of MSN Messenger. If you do not sign out of MSN Messenger, you remain on a data connection, which might result in additional charges from your service provider. The session will not time out or end unless one of the following occurs:

User ends instant messenger session User accepts an incoming voice call An outgoing voice call is placed The device is turned off or moves out of range Send instant messages You can send instant messages from your MSN Messenger to contacts on your messenger list. To send Instant Messages:

1. 2. You can also manage your contacts and control their visibility. To manage contacts in the MSN Messenger:

Select the person to whom you want to send an instant message and tap Send. Enter your message, and tap Send. Tap Menu > Add New Contacts to create a new contact. Tap Menu > Contact Options > Delete to delete an existing contact. Tap Menu > Block/Unblock to block or unblock the selected contact from seeing your status and sending you instant messages. NOTE: Tap Menu > My Text to add common messages when composing instant messages. Tap Menu > Invite to invite a contact to an ongoing chat. You can also see who is already talking to you or change between chats by tapping Menu > Chats. Change your status You can change your status on MSN Messenger according to your need. To change your status:

1. 2. Tap and select your name in the contact list. Press Menu > Change Appearances, and navigate to select the required status. Windows Live Messenger 91 OMA DRM Client Placeholder More information required. Pocket Panel Lite Placeholder More information required. SMS cell broadcast Placeholder More information required. SIM Toolkit Placeholder More information required. Sim Manager Placeholder More information required. iPAQ power Placeholder More information required. iPAQ backlight Placeholder More information required. TTY Placeholder More information required. 92 Chapter 18 Applications 19 Product specifications System specifications NOTE: Not all models described are available in all countries/regions. For more information on specifications for your particular model, on your HP iPAQ, tap Start > Settings > System > HP Asset Viewer. System Feature Processor Operating System Memory External Power Display SD Slot Headphone Jack Antenna Audio Battery Bluetooth WLAN Camera Description Marvell PXA270 (Bulverde) 520 MHz Microsoft Windows Mobile 6 Professional 128 MB/256 MB RAM/ROM Power adapter: input 100240 Vac, 200 mA, 50 to 60 Hz and output +5 Vdc, 1 A USB charger: 5 Vdc, 100/500 mA 2.8 240x320 TFT LCD with touch screen Supports MicroSD memory Placeholder Internal WLAN and Bluetooth antennas Placeholder 1590 mAh Li-Ion removable/rechargeable battery Bluetooth 2.0, Profiles: Handsfree/ OBEX/ PAN/ FTP/ Serial Port/ A2DP, 10 m range (approximately 33 ft) High-speed, low-power, short-range wireless communication with other Bluetooth devices IEEE 802.11b/g 3 M pixels Auto-focus (10 cm to infinity) 4x Digital Zoom Video recording with audio (max. QVGA) Physical specifications Length Width US 4.61 inches 2.37 inches Metric 117 mm 60.3 mm System specifications 93 Depth Weight US 0.68 inches Metric 17.3 mm With battery: 5.149 oz With battery: 146 g Without battery: 4.021 oz Without battery: 114 g Operating environment Temperature Operating Non-operating Relative Humidity Operating Non-operating US 14 to 113 F 4 to 140 F 85 % RH 90 % RH Metric 10 to 45 C 20 to 60 C 85 % RH 90 % RH 94 Chapter 19 Product specifications 20 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo

(United States Only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call 1-800-HP-INVENT (1-800-474-6836) Federal Communications Commission Notice 95 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Canadian Notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union Notice Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with thecorrect CEmarked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. This CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. This CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, D-71034 Bblingen, Germany The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

96 Chapter 20 Regulatory notices Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN Devices France L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions: cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire-2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Battery Warning WARNING! This HP iPAQ contains a lithium ion rechargeable battery. To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. Replace only with the HP spare. WARNING! Fire, Explosion, And Severe Burn Hazard. Do Recharge, Crush, Disassemble, Heat above (100 C/212 F), or Incinerate. CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. Battery Recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, visit http://www.hp.com/recycle. Battery Disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Battery Warning 97 Equipment Warning WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, electrical shock, fire or damage to the equipment:

Plug the AC adapter into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the equipment by unplugging the AC adapter from the AC outlet or unplugging the synchronization cable from the host computer. Do not place anything on the power cord or any of the other cables. Arrange them so that no one may accidentally step on or trip over them. Do not pull on a cord or cable. When unplugging from the electrical outlet, grasp the cord by the plug or, in the case of the AC adapter, grasp the AC adapter and pull out from the electrical outlet. Do not use converter kits sold for appliances to power your HP iPAQ. Acoustics Warning WARNING! Listening to this device at high volume levels and for extended durations may damage ones hearing. In order to reduce the risk of damage to hearing, one should lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level, and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. Headsets or earphones used with this device should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. HP recommends using the headset delivered with your iPAQ (part number 455673-001) that is in compliance with EN 50332-1. 98 Chapter 20 Regulatory notices Class 1 LED Product Airline Travel Notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Medical Electronic Equipment If you have a medical condition that requires you to use a pacemaker, hearing aid, or any type of medical electronic equipment, consult the manufacturer of the equipment to determine if the medical equipment is shielded from RF energy. Turn off your HP iPAQ in health care facilities or hospitals when there are posted restrictions requiring you to do so. SAR Notice THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the international guidelines is 2.0 W/kg*. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the device. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, compliance with the European R&TTE directive must be shown. This directive includes as one essential requirement the protection of the health and the safety for the user and any other person. The highest non-FCC SAR value for this device when tested for use at the ear is 0.791 W/kg (10g). This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation other than the HP belt clip supplied with the product, it should not contain metal.

* The non-FCC SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. Wireless Notices In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, etc. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this device, please ask for authorization to use it prior to turning it on. Class 1 LED Product 99 U.S. Regulatory Wireless Notice WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antenna should be minimized. No metallic body accessories are allowed and 2.5 cm spacing between PDA and the body must be maintained to satisfy RF Exposure. This PDA has been tested and demonstrated compliance when WLAN with Bluetooth,and GSM with Bluetooth are transmitting simultaneously. The highest FCC SAR value for this device when tested for use at the head is 1.59 W/kg and when tested for use at the body is 1.46 W/kg. This PDA must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. SAR compliance for body-worn operations is restricted to the holster <M/N: 459084-001> designated or supplied for this product and to belt-clips, holsters, or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and which provide at least 2.5cm separation between the device and the users body. Canadian Regulatory Wireless Notice Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Brazilian Notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Singaporean Wireless Notice Switch off your cellular telephone when in an aircraft. The use of cellular telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the cellular network, and is illegal. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action or both. Users are advised not to use the equipment when at a refueling point. Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress. The use of the Alert device to operate a vehicles lights or horn on public roads is not permitted. It is advised that a handheld microphone or telephone handset should not be used by the driver while the vehicle is moving, except in an emergency. Speak only into a fixed, neck slung or clipped-on microphone when it would not distract your attention from the road. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, it is recommended that no part of the human body be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. 100 Chapter 20 Regulatory notices Japanese Notice Wireless LAN 802.11b Devices Wireless LAN 802.11g Devices Bluetooth Devices Taiwan DGT Notice Japanese Notice 101 1. SAR ? 1.6W/Kg ;

??GSM:900 1.0 W/Kg PCN:1800 0.497 W/Kg 2. Korean Notice 102 Chapter 20 Regulatory notices 21 Frequently Asked Questions I am having trouble turning on my HP iPAQ. What should I do?

Your HP iPAQ displays to have problems with the battery. Please perform the following checks:

Is the battery charged?

Is the battery properly installed?

Are the contacts on the battery and phone clean? If the contacts appear to be soiled, contact your dealer to get them cleaned. I am unable to make or receive calls. How do I fix this?

If you have problems making or receiving calls, please perform the following checks:

Is the reception of the network signal good?

Is the network set up properly? If necessary, try to select your network manually. Have you activated the Fixed Dialing, Call Forwarding, and Call Barring functions? If yes, deactivate them temporarily. Are you using your HP iPAQ with other SIM cards with the Enable SIM PIN function activated? If yes, deactivate the function temporarily. Is your HP iPAQ switched to the Flight mode? If yes, turn it off. Are you currently located within closed boundaries? If yes, move to an open space or closer to a window. I have trouble connecting to the Internet. What should I do?

If you have trouble connecting to the Internet, please perform the following checks:

Make sure you have subscribed for a data service from your service operator. Make sure you entered correct setting parameters, such as APN and IP addresses in data profile setup. I am unable to hear voices clearly. How do I resolve this?

If you are unable to hear to voices clearly, make sure you have turned off the in-call mute function. I cannot use certain call functions. What should I do?

To use certain advanced call functions, such as Call Forwarding and Call Barring, you may need to subscribe to these services from your service operator. I am having trouble turning on my HP iPAQ. What should I do? 103 Why do I hear disturbing noises during a phone call?

You may hear disturbing noises if you use your HP iPAQ near a microwave oven, speakers, or a television set. Avoid using your HP iPAQ near such items as it has an adverse effect on the voice quality. Why are the standby and talk time shorter at times?

Follow the guidelines given below to improve the standby and talk times on your HP iPAQ. The HP iPAQ may consume more power when the signal reception is poor. Try to move to an open location when you use your HP iPAQ. If you are using a new battery, it may take several charging and discharging cycles for the battery to reach its original capacity. Use the HP iPAQ after charging it completely. If your battery is very old, replace it with a new one. Avoid using the HP iPAQ in very high or low temperature environments. The efficiency of a battery can be effected by extreme temperature conditions. Why does the HP iPAQ operate slowly at times?

You should have at least 1.5 to 2 MB of free memory space on your HP iPAQ so that the device operates efficiently. To check the free memory space, tap Start > Settings > System > Memory. Remember to delete or transfer old e-mail messages and pictures on your HP iPAQ to free available memory space. Why do I see the Today screen layout error message on my HP iPAQ display screen?

You will get a Today screen layout error message if you did not select a Today screen layout. To correct this, tap Start > Settings > System > Screen and select a layout for the Today screen. I have trouble charging my battery. What should I do?

If you have trouble charging your battery, please perform the following checks:

Is the battery charger correctly plugged into the battery charger socket on the HP iPAQ?

Is the power cord of the charger damaged?

Is the battery very old? If yes, replace with a new battery and try again. I am unable to use the ActiveSync feature. What should I do?

To be able to use the ActiveSync feature, upgrade your computer to the latest version of ActiveSync. It is recommended to use ActiveSync 4.5 or a higher version. Visit http://www.microsoft.com/downloads for the latest versions. My HP iPAQ was not connected during WMDC installation?

Although you do not need to connect your HP iPAQ during the installation process of WMDC, it is highly recommended to have it connected. 104 Chapter 21 Frequently Asked Questions Which factors degrade the GPS signal and affect accuracy?

The GPS signal slows down when:

It passes through the atmosphere. It reflects off objects such as tall buildings or large rock surfaces before reaching the receiver. Performance is impacted when the device is used inside vehicles having thermal glass windshields. The thermally shielded glass blocks the GPS signal from reaching the device. You are indoor, underwater, or underground. You are running multiple applications whiile connecting. My HP iPAQ was not connected during WMDC installation?

It is not a strict requirement that you have your HP iPAQ connected during the installation process of WMDC, but it is highly recommend that you do. My HP iPAQ was connected while I was installing but WMDC does not launch even after installation?

In some cases after an upgrade, you will need to disconnect and reconnect the device for WMDC to launch. Can I connect for the first time via Bluetooth?

The initial connection between your HP iPAQ and the desktop WMDC application needs to happen with a mini-USB synchronization cable. After this initial connection, you will be able to set up Bluetooth for future connections. Which factors degrade the GPS signal and affect accuracy? 105 22 Guidelines for care and maintenance It is recommended that you follow certain guidelines to prevent possible damage to your HP iPAQ and to keep it in a good condition. Use your HP iPAQ Avoid using your HP iPAQ in dusty and extremely high or low temperature environments. Do not spill water on your HP iPAQ or use it in the rain. Avoid removing the battery without turning off your HP iPAQ in advance. Do not apply strong force or shock to your HP iPAQ. Keep the HP iPAQ and its accessories away from children. Do not insert metal objects into the charging/communications port of your HP iPAQ. This can short-circuit the battery and result in danger. Transfer your SMS messages from the HP iPAQ's memory to the SIM card memory. Cleaning your HP iPAQ Use a soft, clean, and slightly moistened cloth to clean your HP iPAQ. Do not let water come into contact with the earpiece, microphone, or the metal surface. Do not wipe your HP iPAQ with any corrosive liquid or coarse objects. This can damage the outer surface of your HP iPAQ. Carrying or storing your HP iPAQ Do not leave your HP iPAQ in extreme high or low temperature environments. Remove the battery from your HP iPAQ if it is not going to be used for a long period of time. Store the HP iPAQ and its battery in a cool, dark, and dry place. Use accessories Use original HP batteries and chargers to charge your HP iPAQ. Do not use your HP iPAQ battery and charger for other purposes. For information on accessories for your iPAQ, visit http://www.hp.com/accessories/ipaq. Use your HP iPAQ in public places Turn off your HP iPAQ or switch it to silent mode when you are asked to in public places. 106 Chapter 22 Guidelines for care and maintenance

HP iPAQ Product Guide Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. HP iPAQ products are powered by Microsoft Windows Mobile 6 Professional with Messaging and Security Feature Pack. Microsoft Windows, the Windows logo, Outlook, Windows Mobile Device Center, and ActiveSync are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. under license. All other product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. Hewlett-Packard Company shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. The information is provided as is without warranty of any kind and is subject to change without notice. The warranties for Hewlett-Packard products are set forth in the express limited warranty statements accompanying such products. Nothing herein should be construed as an additional warranty. This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. August 2007 Document Part Number: 455719001 Table of contents 1 Register your HP iPAQ 2 Box contents 3 Components Front panel components ....................................................................................................................... 3 Top and bottom panel components ...................................................................................................... 4 Left and right side components ............................................................................................................ 5 Back panel components ....................................................................................................................... 6 4 Set up your HP iPAQ Step 1: Remove the battery cover and insert the SIM card .................................................................. 7 Step 2: Install the battery and replace the battery cover ...................................................................... 8 Step 3: Charge the battery ................................................................................................................... 9 Step 4: Turn on your HP iPAQ ............................................................................................................. 9 Protect your HP iPAQ with a password ................................................................................................ 9 Find the serial and model number ...................................................................................................... 10 Status Icons ........................................................................................................................................ 10 5 Learn the basics The Today screen .............................................................................................................................. 12 TodayPanel Lite ................................................................................................................................. 12 Enter text ............................................................................................................................................ 13 Customize your HP iPAQ ................................................................................................................... 14 Device information ............................................................................................................. 14 Enter owner information ..................................................................................................... 14 Change the regional settings ............................................................................................. 14 Adjust the volume .............................................................................................................. 15 Change the power management settings .......................................................................... 15 Dim or adjust the brightness of the backlight ..................................................................... 15 Install and remove programs ............................................................................................. 16 Open and close programs ................................................................................................. 16 Set alarms and clocks ........................................................................................................ 16 Shortcut menus .................................................................................................................. 17 Display the clock in title bar ............................................................................................... 17 Create and assign a category ............................................................................................ 17 Adjust the speed for scrolling through items in a list .......................................................... 17 View the Operating System (OS) information .................................................................................... 17 Lock and unlock your HP iPAQ .......................................................................................................... 18 Battery saving tips .............................................................................................................................. 18 6 Use your Business Navigator iii Use the keypad .................................................................................................................................. 19 Smart-Touch Navigation wheel .......................................................................................... 19 Answer/Send key ............................................................................................................... 19 End key .............................................................................................................................. 19 Enter key ............................................................................................................................ 19 Back space key .................................................................................................................. 19 Softkeys ............................................................................................................................. 19 3-Way Thumb-Wheel ......................................................................................................................... 19 Call features ....................................................................................................................................... 20 Make a call ......................................................................................................................... 20 Answer a call ..................................................................................................................... 20 Call waiting ........................................................................................................................ 20 Redial a number ................................................................................................................ 20 Call a contact ..................................................................................................................... 20 Make a call from the Today screen ................................................................... 21 Make a call from the contacts ........................................................................... 21 Change the default number for a contact .......................................................... 21 Make emergency calls ....................................................................................................... 21 Make calls using speed dials ............................................................................................. 21 Voice mail .......................................................................................................................... 22 Handsfree function ............................................................................................................. 22 Monitor phone usage ......................................................................................................... 22 Make data calls .................................................................................................................. 22 Mute a call ......................................................................................................................... 23 Put a call on hold ............................................................................................................... 23 Make a conference call ...................................................................................................... 23 Make a call from a hyperlink phone number ...................................................................... 23 Dial international numbers ................................................................................................. 23 Call history .......................................................................................................................................... 24 Manage calls using call history .......................................................................................... 24 Make calls using call history .............................................................................................. 24 View call details ................................................................................................................. 24 Voice commands ................................................................................................................................ 24 Check connection and signal strength ............................................................................................... 25 Change the SIM PIN .......................................................................................................................... 25 Change service settings ..................................................................................................................... 26 Change phone service settings ......................................................................................... 26 Forward calls ..................................................................................................... 26 Configure caller ID ............................................................................................ 26 Block calls ......................................................................................................... 26 Set up voice mail or text messaging center number ......................................... 26 Limit calls to specific area codes or phone numbers ........................................ 27 Change network settings .................................................................................................................... 27 Change phone network settings ........................................................................................ 27 View available phone networks ......................................................................................... 27 Set preferred networks ...................................................................................................... 27 Manually selecting a phone Network ................................................................................. 28 Change the ring tone and ring type .................................................................................................... 28 Take notes during a call ..................................................................................................................... 28 Select a frequency band automatically ............................................................................................... 29 iv Copy a contact from a SIM to a device .............................................................................................. 29 Add Tele-typewriter (TTY) functionality .............................................................................................. 29 Add TTY functionality for people who are deaf or hard-of-hearing .................................... 29 Enable TTY support ........................................................................................................... 30 Make a phone call using the TTY enabled HP iPAQ ......................................................... 30 Disable TTY support .......................................................................................................... 30 Voice notes ......................................................................................................................................... 31 Create voice votes ............................................................................................................. 31 Delete voice notes ............................................................................................................. 31 Listen to voice notes .......................................................................................................... 31 Rename voice notes .......................................................................................................... 32 Configure channels ............................................................................................................................ 32 HSDPA ............................................................................................................................................... 32 Differences between GSM and GPRS/EDGE/WCDMA/3G technology ............................................. 32 7 Camera Use the camera .................................................................................................................................. 33 Capture photos .................................................................................................................. 33 View photos ....................................................................................................................... 33 Change camera settings .................................................................................................................... 33 Change brightness settings ............................................................................................... 33 Change resolution settings ................................................................................................ 33 Change mode settings ....................................................................................................... 34 Video recorder .................................................................................................................................... 34 Record videos .................................................................................................................... 34 Configure video format ...................................................................................................... 35 Transfer images ................................................................................................................................. 35 Use GPRS ......................................................................................................................... 35 Use Bluetooth .................................................................................................................... 35 8 HP Photosmart Mobile HP Photosmart Mobile ....................................................................................................................... 36 Attach a voice note to a picture .......................................................................................................... 36 E-mail pictures .................................................................................................................................... 36 Snapfish ............................................................................................................................................. 37 View a slideshow ................................................................................................................................ 37 9 Notes Write a note ........................................................................................................................................ 38 Create a copy of a note ...................................................................................................................... 38 Create a voice note ............................................................................................................................ 38 10 Storage cards Use storage cards .............................................................................................................................. 40 Insert a storage card .......................................................................................................................... 40 Remove a storage card ...................................................................................................................... 40 View content of a storage card ........................................................................................................... 41 v 11 Synchronization Synchronization software ................................................................................................................... 42 Copy files ............................................................................................................................................ 42 Migrate data from Palm Desktop to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6 ...................................................... 42 Wireless Synchronization Cost Saving Tips ....................................................................................... 43 Troubleshoot synchronization Issues ................................................................................................. 43 Customized links in WMDC ................................................................................................................ 45 12 Tasks Set start and due dates for a task ...................................................................................................... 46 Show start and due dates in the task list ............................................................................................ 46 Set options for displaying tasks on the Today screen ........................................................................ 46 Mark a task as completed .................................................................................................................. 46 13 Messaging Understand messages ....................................................................................................................... 47 Folder types ........................................................................................................................................ 47 Synchronize E-mail ............................................................................................................................ 48 Set up messaging accounts ............................................................................................................... 48 Set up e-mail using exchange server ................................................................................ 48 Internet E-mail ................................................................................................................... 49 Create a new POP3 or IMAP4 account ............................................................. 49 Change E-mail download options ..................................................................... 50 Delete an account ............................................................................................. 50 Text messaging ................................................................................................................. 51 MMS .................................................................................................................................. 51 MMS composer .................................................................................................................. 51 Receive attachments ......................................................................................................... 52 Receive meeting requests ................................................................................................. 52 Create or change a signature ............................................................................................ 53 Use messaging ................................................................................................................................... 53 Compose and send messages .......................................................................................... 53 Reply or forward a message .............................................................................................. 54 Add an attachment to a message ...................................................................................... 54 Download messages ......................................................................................................... 54 Download messages from a server ................................................................................... 54 Install an online address book ............................................................................................................ 55 14 Calendar Access calendar ................................................................................................................................. 56 Change the display of the work week ................................................................................................. 56 Set a default reminder for all new appointments ................................................................................ 56 Update an appointment ...................................................................................................................... 56 Cancel an appointment ...................................................................................................................... 57 15 Contacts Create a contact ................................................................................................................................. 58 Delete a contact ................................................................................................................................. 58 Change contact information ............................................................................................................... 58 vi Copy a contact ................................................................................................................................... 58 Find a contact ..................................................................................................................................... 59 Send an E-mail message to a contact ................................................................................................ 59 Send a text message to a contact ...................................................................................................... 59 Add and remove a picture .................................................................................................................. 60 Use the contact list ............................................................................................................................. 60 16 Connections iPAQ Wireless .................................................................................................................................... 61 WLAN ................................................................................................................................................. 62 WLAN Terms ..................................................................................................................... 62 Automatically connect to a WLAN network ........................................................................ 62 Manually connect to a WLAN network ............................................................................... 63 Find an IP address ............................................................................................................. 63 Delete a wireless network .................................................................................................. 63 Configure 802.1x authentication settings ........................................................................... 64 Bluetooth ............................................................................................................................................ 64 Bluetooth terms .................................................................................................................. 64 Bluetooth manager ............................................................................................................ 65 Connect to a computer via Bluetooth ................................................................................. 65 Use your HP iPAQ as a wireless modem with Bluetooth ................................................... 65 Bluetooth device profiles .................................................................................................... 66 Create, end, and accept a Bluetooth partnership .............................................................. 66 Rename a Bluetooth partnership ....................................................................................... 67 Pair and unpair devices ..................................................................................................... 68 Make a device discoverable .............................................................................................. 69 Open Bluetooth settings .................................................................................................... 69 Authorization to access services ....................................................................................... 69 Use a passkey or bond ...................................................................................................... 69 Set a Bluetooth shared folder ............................................................................................ 70 Set up an incoming or outgoing Bluetooth COM port ........................................................ 70 GPRS/EDGE ...................................................................................................................................... 70 GPRS/EDGE ..................................................................................................................... 70 Change GPRS network settings ........................................................................................ 71 Edit network parameters .................................................................................................... 71 Edit an Internet connection ............................................................................... 71 Edit MMS multimedia messages settings ......................................................... 72 Edit WAP information settings ........................................................................... 72 Troubleshoot automatic detection ...................................................................................... 72 Advanced settings .............................................................................................................................. 72 Connect to intranet URLs .................................................................................................. 72 Change an intranet URL .................................................................................................... 73 Set up an automatic choice for connections ...................................................................... 73 Set up proxy server settings .............................................................................................. 73 Set up a WAP gateway ...................................................................................................... 73 Configure advanced proxy settings ................................................................................... 74 Advanced connection settings ........................................................................................... 74 Set up a VPN server connection ........................................................................................ 75 Change a connection group name ..................................................................................... 75 End a connection ............................................................................................................... 75 vii Configure VoIP .................................................................................................................. 76 17 GPS navigation Google Maps ...................................................................................................................................... 77 Install Google Maps ........................................................................................................... 77 Launch and navigate Google Maps ................................................................................... 77 Uninstall Google Maps ....................................................................................................... 77 18 Applications HP applications .................................................................................................................................. 78 HP Help and Support ......................................................................................................... 78 HP Voice Reply .................................................................................................................. 78 HP iPAQ Setup Assistant .................................................................................................. 79 HP iPAQ Shortcuts ............................................................................................................ 80 Use HP iPAQ Shortcuts .................................................................................... 80 Edit HP iPAQ Shortcuts .................................................................................... 80 HP iPAQ DataConnect ...................................................................................................... 80 HP Asset Viewer ................................................................................................................ 81 Certificate Enroller ............................................................................................................. 81 Manage certificates ............................................................................................................ 82 HP iPAQ Tips ..................................................................................................................... 82 HP Voice Commander ....................................................................................................... 82 HP iPAQ Mobile Broadband Connect ................................................................................ 82 HP Enterprise Mobility Agent (mProveDM) ....................................................................... 83 HP iPAQ File Store ............................................................................................................ 83 HP PrintSmart Mobile ........................................................................................................ 83 HP Keyguard ..................................................................................................................... 83 HP SecureConnect Mobile ................................................................................................ 84 HP iPAQ Ring Tone Manager ............................................................................................ 84 HP iPAQ Audio Applet ....................................................................................................... 84 Pocket Internet Explorer (PIE) ........................................................................................... 85 Remote Desktop Mobile ..................................................................................................................... 85 Windows Media Player ....................................................................................................................... 86 Clear the Now Playing List ................................................................................................. 86 Update a Library ................................................................................................................ 86 Use HP Voice Commander to play media files .................................................................. 86 MS Office applications ........................................................................................................................ 86 Word Mobile ....................................................................................................................... 86 Excel Mobile ...................................................................................................................... 87 PowerPoint Mobile ............................................................................................................. 87 Games ................................................................................................................................................ 88 Bubble Breaker .................................................................................................................. 88 Solitaire .............................................................................................................................. 88 Internet Sharing .................................................................................................................................. 89 To connect to a laptop using a USB data connection ........................................................ 89 To connect to a laptop using Bluetooth data connection ................................................... 90 Internet Explorer ................................................................................................................................. 90 Windows Live Messenger .................................................................................................................. 90 Sign in and out of messenger ............................................................................................ 91 Send instant messages ..................................................................................................... 91 viii Change your status ............................................................................................................ 91 OMA DRM Client ................................................................................................................................ 92 Pocket Panel Lite ............................................................................................................................... 92 SMS cell broadcast ............................................................................................................................ 92 SIM Toolkit ......................................................................................................................................... 92 Sim Manager ...................................................................................................................................... 92 iPAQ power ........................................................................................................................................ 92 iPAQ backlight .................................................................................................................................... 92 TTY ..................................................................................................................................................... 92 19 Product specifications System specifications ......................................................................................................................... 93 Physical specifications ....................................................................................................................... 93 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................... 94 20 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission Notice ................................................................................... 95 Modifications ...................................................................................................................... 95 Cables ................................................................................................................................ 95 Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo (United States Only) . 95 Canadian Notice ................................................................................................................................. 96 Avis Canadien .................................................................................................................................... 96 European Union Notice ...................................................................................................................... 96 Products with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN Devices ................................................................. 97 France ............................................................................................................... 97 Italy .................................................................................................................... 97 Battery Warning .................................................................................................................................. 97 Battery Recycling ............................................................................................................................... 97 Battery Disposal ................................................................................................................................. 97 Equipment Warning ............................................................................................................................ 98 Acoustics Warning .............................................................................................................................. 98 Class 1 LED Product .......................................................................................................................... 99 Airline Travel Notice ........................................................................................................................... 99 Medical Electronic Equipment ............................................................................................................ 99 SAR Notice ......................................................................................................................................... 99 Wireless Notices ................................................................................................................................. 99 U.S. Regulatory Wireless Notice ..................................................................................... 100 Canadian Regulatory Wireless Notice ............................................................................. 100 Brazilian Notice ................................................................................................................ 100 Singaporean Wireless Notice .......................................................................................... 100 Japanese Notice ............................................................................................................................... 101 Wireless LAN 802.11b Devices ....................................................................................... 101 Wireless LAN 802.11g Devices ....................................................................................... 101 Bluetooth Devices ............................................................................................................ 101 Taiwan DGT Notice .......................................................................................................................... 101 Korean Notice ................................................................................................................................... 102 21 Frequently Asked Questions I am having trouble turning on my HP iPAQ. What should I do? ...................................................... 103 ix I am unable to make or receive calls. How do I fix this? .................................................................. 103 I have trouble connecting to the Internet. What should I do? ........................................................... 103 I am unable to hear voices clearly. How do I resolve this? .............................................................. 103 I cannot use certain call functions. What should I do? ..................................................................... 103 Why do I hear disturbing noises during a phone call? ...................................................................... 104 Why are the standby and talk time shorter at times? ....................................................................... 104 Why does the HP iPAQ operate slowly at times? ............................................................................ 104 Why do I see the Today screen layout error message on my HP iPAQ display screen? ................. 104 I have trouble charging my battery. What should I do? .................................................................... 104 I am unable to use the ActiveSync feature. What should I do? ........................................................ 104 My HP iPAQ was not connected during WMDC installation? ........................................................... 104 Which factors degrade the GPS signal and affect accuracy? .......................................................... 105 My HP iPAQ was not connected during WMDC installation? ........................................................... 105 My HP iPAQ was connected while I was installing but WMDC does not launch even after installation? ...................................................................................................................................... 105 Can I connect for the first time via Bluetooth? .................................................................................. 105 22 Guidelines for care and maintenance Use your HP iPAQ ............................................................................................................................ 106 Cleaning your HP iPAQ .................................................................................................................... 106 Carrying or storing your HP iPAQ .................................................................................................... 106 Use accessories ............................................................................................................................... 106 Use your HP iPAQ in public places .................................................................................................. 106 x 1 Register your HP iPAQ You need to register your HP iPAQ with Hewlett-Packard to be able to:

Access support and services, and get the most out of your HP products. Sign up for free support alerts, software updates, and personalized newsletters. Manage your profile. After registering your HP iPAQ, you will receive an e-mail message regarding special offers and promotions. Visit http://www.register.hp.com to register your HP iPAQ or update your mail or e-mail address after registration. You are required to enter your user ID and registration password to edit your profile online. NOTE: Registration is not supported in all countries/regions. 1 2 Box contents This illustration depicts the items that come in the box with your HP iPAQ. NOTE: Box contents vary by model.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) HP iPAQ Stylus 1590 mAh Li-Ion removable/rechargeable battery Getting Started CD with additional software HP iPAQ documentation Wired stereo headset NOTE: Listening to personal stereo equipment at full volume for long periods can damage hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing loss, do not spend much time listening to personal stereo equipment at full volume. HP recommends use of the headset manufactured by Merry, part number XXX, that is included with your HP iPAQ. AC adapter with interchangeable plug NOTE: The AC adapter is provided with one or more interchangeable plug, which might not be attached. Attach the correct plug for your country/region. Mini-USB charging/synchronization cable Screen protector film 2 Chapter 2 Box contents 3 Components NOTE: Not all models or features are available in all countries/regions. Front panel components Component Function

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Touch Screen Display Use to view the contents on the screen. Use stylus to select items, navigate menus, change feature settings, and play games. Right Softkey End Key Press to launch Messaging from the Today screen. Press to end a phone call. Back Space Key Press back space and clear text one at a time. Enter Key Power Key Press to open an application or insert a line break while typing messages. Press and hold to switch your HP iPAQ on or off. Smart-Touch Navigation Wheel Use to navigate and scroll through items on the screen. Keyboard Use keys on the keyboard to enter text, dial numbers, or navigate menus. Landscape/Portrait Key Press to switch between the landscape and portrait views. Front panel components 3 Component Function

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14) ok Key Windows Key Press to confirm your selection. Press to display the Start menu. Answer/Send Key Press to answer a call or to view the on-screen keypad. Left SoftKey LEDs Press to launch HP iPAQ Shortcuts from the Today screen. Solid Red Charging Flashing Amber One or more notifications received Solid Green Full Charged Flashing Red Low battery warning Flashing Green Within GPRS/GSM/EDGE/WCDMA/3G coverage area Flashing Blue WLAN or Bluetooth on Blue Off WLAN and Bluetooth off Top and bottom panel components Component Function

(1)

(2)

(3) Vibrate key Use to set your HP iPAQ in vibration mode. Charging/Communications Port Use to connect the mini-USB charging/synchronization cable. Reset Use to soft reset your HP iPAQ. WARNING! Resetting your HP iPAQ before turning it off might corrupt data present on your HP iPAQ. 4 Chapter 3 Components Left and right side components Component Function

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) ok Key Press to confirm your selection. 3-Way Thumb-Wheel Use to navigate and scroll through items on the screen and confirm your selection. HP Voice Commander Key Press to launch the HP Voice Commander application. Camera Key Test Port Press to use the camera and click pictures. Use to receive GPS signal. Left and right side components 5 Back panel components Component Function

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Back Speaker Use the speaker to listen to music or as a speakerphone. Self Portrait Mirror Use the mirror lens to center your own image for a self-photograph. Camera Stylus Cover Latch Battery Cover Flash Light With the camera turned on, frame the subject in the camera lens and view it on your HP iPAQ screen before capturing the photo. Remove and use to select elements on the screen and input information. Slide down to remove the stylus. Slide up to replace the stylus. Press the cover latch on the battery cover and slide the cover down and away from the HP iPAQ. Remove to insert or remove the battery and/or the SIM card. Turn on the flash light while capturing pictures in dim light. 6 Chapter 3 Components 4 Set up your HP iPAQ Step 1: Remove the battery cover and insert the SIM card Press the cover latch on the battery cover and slide the cover down and away from the HP iPAQ. 1. 2. Slide the SIM card slot cover and open it. Step 1: Remove the battery cover and insert the SIM card 7 3. Place the SIM card into the SIM card slot. NOTE: Make sure that the metal contacts are facing down and the notched corner is in the correct position. 4. Slide back the SIM card slot cover until it locks into place. Step 2: Install the battery and replace the battery cover

!

1. 2. Align the battery connectors on the battery with the housing pins in the battery compartment, and insert the battery. Place the battery cover down and slide up until it locks into place. 8 Chapter 4 Set up your HP iPAQ Step 3: Charge the battery iP A Q B u si n e s s N a vi g a t o r CAUTION: To avoid damaging your HP iPAQ or the AC adapter, make sure all connectors are properly aligned before connecting. The battery provides power for your HP iPAQ to operate. Use the mini-USB synchronization cable, that comes with your HP iPAQ, to charge the device. It takes approximately 24 hours to fully charge the battery for the first time. Subsequent charges might take longer. 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to an electrical outlet. 3. Connect the mini-USB synchronization cable to the charging/communications port on your Insert the USB end of the mini-USB synchronization cable into the port on the AC adapter. HP iPAQ. The cable connector only fits one way. If the connector does not insert easily, turn it over. TIP: You can also charge the battery by connecting your HP iPAQ to a USB port on your computer using the mini-USB synchronization cable. NOTE: Whenever a replacement battery is inserted into your HP iPAQ, press the Power key for at least two seconds. In case the device does not turn on, attach an AC adapter to turn on your HP iPAQ. Step 4: Turn on your HP iPAQ Press and hold the Power key to turn on your HP iPAQ. Next, follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. Use the on-screen keypad to enter information. Protect your HP iPAQ with a password You can secure data on your HP iPAQ by setting a password. Each time you turn on your HP iPAQ, you will be prompted to enter the password. To set a password:

1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > Lock. Select the Prompt if device unused for check box. Then, select the amount of time your HP iPAQ should remain unused before you are prompted to enter the password. In the Password type list, select the type of password you would like to use. Next, enter the password, and then confirm the password. 3. Step 3: Charge the battery 9 4. On the Hint tab, enter a phrase to help you remember your password. Make sure that your hint does not allow others to guess your password. The hint is displayed after the wrong password is entered five times in a row. 5. When prompted, tap ok. The next time your HP iPAQ is unused for the specified amount of time, you are prompted to enter your password. TIP: Use the same steps as above to change or reset your password. Find the serial and model number Locate the serial and model numbers before contacting HP Customer Support, particularly if you are calling for in-warranty support. View the serial number and model ID by tapping Start > Programs > HP Help and Support > Serial and Model Number. To locate the serial and model number:

1. Remove the battery cover. 2. Remove the battery from the unit. 3. NOTE: Tap Start > Settings > System > HP Asset Viewer > Identity to view the serial number and tap Start > Settings > System > HP Asset Viewer > System to view the model number on your HP iPAQ. Locate the label containing the product ID and serial number underneath the battery. Status Icons The following table lists the common status indicators and their meanings. Icon Status Icon Status Missed call Voice call active No SIM card installed Call forwarding active Call on hold SIM card fault New Voice mail New e-mail or SMS Instant message received Battery level Battery level low Vibrate mode on Battery charging Sync error 10 Chapter 4 Set up your HP iPAQ Icon Status Ringer off Wi-Fi on Roaming Icon Status Speaker phone on Bluetooth General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) available GPRS available in roaming GPRS in use Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution

(EDGE) available EDGE available in roaming EDGE in use Phone connection unavailable or network error Signal strength Radio off Status Icons 11 5 Learn the basics Get started with your HP iPAQ by learning basic functions such as knowing the Today screen, entering text, and synchronizing data. The Today screen Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Today. The Today screen displays the date and time and provides a quick status of the remaining battery capacity, upcoming appointments, your current profile, and the number of unread text messages. At the top of the Today screen, connectivity icons, volume indicator, and clock are displayed. To customize the Today screen:

1. 2. On the Appearance tab, select the required theme for the background of the Today screen. 3. On the Items tab, select the items to appear on the Today screen. TIP: To move the order in which the items appear, tap Start > Settings > Personal > Today. On the Items tab, tap Move Up or Move Down. NOTE: There are two default softkeys on the bottom of the Today screen: Shortcuts and Messaging. On the Today screen, the Messaging softkey is also the Notification softkey. Any type of alert, such as a meeting reminder, is displayed on the Today screen as a notification. TodayPanel Lite Icon Name Description TodayPanel Lite Battery power Main memory Storage memory Backlight Use to change the TodayPanel Lite options or the Today screen settings. Use to view the amount of remaining battery turn on your HP iPAQ. Set the standby period, time duration for turning off the HP iPAQ, and USB charging method. Use to view the amount of available main memory on your HP iPAQ. View, activate, and stop all running programs from this screen. Use to view the amount of available storage memory on your HP iPAQ. View, activate, and stop all running programs from this screen. Use to view and change the backlight options on your HP iPAQ. To use TodayPanel Lite, tap the required icon, make the necessary changes, and tap ok. 12 Chapter 5 Learn the basics You can change the TodayPanel Lite icons to compact mode, which allows more space on the Today screen. You can also change the memory and storage settings to display as percentages instead of file sizes. To change the TodayPanel Lite icons to compact mode:

1.

(TodayPanel Lite) icon > Options to open the TodayPanel Lite application. Tap the Tap the Display Mode list and select Compact. 2. To display memory and storage as percentages:

1.

(TodayPanel Lite) icon > Options to open the TodayPanel Lite application. Tap the Tap the Display Memory as list or the Display Storage as list and select the percentage listed. Tap ok. 2. 3. To remove the TodayPanel Lite application from the Today screen:

1. 2. Clear the TodayPanel check box and tap ok. For more options, visit http://www.rhinocode.com to upgrade to TODAYPANEL.PRO. Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Today > Items. Enter text Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Input. Based on your preference, you can use the on-screen keypad or a handwriting recognition feature such as Block Recognizer, Keyboard, Letter Recognizer, or Transcriber to enter text. 1. 2. On the Input method tab, select a text input method and change options as appropriate. 3. You can now go to a program (such as Notes) and start entering text. Tap ok. Text-Input Method Block Recognizer Keyboard Letter Recognizer Transcriber Definition Use a single stroke to write letters, numbers, symbols, and punctuation marks that get converted into typed text. Tap keys on the keyboard to enter text. Write individual letters, numbers, and punctuation marks that are converted into typed text. Write in cursive, print, or mixed handwriting (consisting of both cursive and print), and convert your writing into typed text. TIP: Change the text-input method from within any program by tapping the Input Selector arrow and tapping an input method. To switch between T9 and multipress mode while entering text, press and hold

* key on the keypad. NOTE: To disable the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel while entering text, press and hold the ok key on the left panel of your HP iPAQ. Enter text 13 Customize your HP iPAQ Device information To get detailed information about your HP iPAQ:

Tap Start > Settings > System > About. The Version tab displays important device information, including the type of processor and the amount of memory installed. The device name is used to identify the HP iPAQ in the following situations:

Synchronizing with a computer Connecting to a network NOTE:

name. To change the device name:

1. 2. If you synchronize multiple devices with the same computer, each device must have a unique Tap Start > Settings > System > About > Device ID. Enter a name for the device. The device name must begin with a letter, consist of letters from A to Z and numbers from 0 to 9, and cannot contain spaces. Enter owner information Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Owner Information. Enter your personal information, such as your name and address, so that the HP iPAQ can be returned to you if it is lost. 1. 2. On the Identification tab, enter your personal information. TIP: You can edit the owner information directly from the Today screen. Change the regional settings The style in which regions, numbers, currency, time, and date are displayed is specified in regional settings. To change the regional settings:

1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > System > Regional Settings > Region. Select a region. The region you select determines the options available on the other tabs. To customize additional settings, tap the appropriate tabs and select the required options. On the Region tab, select the required region display options. On the Number tab, select the required number display options. On the Currency tab, select the required currency display options. On the Time tab, select the required time display options. On the Date tab, select the required date display options. 3. 14 Chapter 5 Learn the basics Adjust the volume You can change the volume for various sounds, such as the sound you hear when you tap program names and menu options. 1.

(Speaker) icon at the top of the screen. Tap 2. Move the system volume slider on the screen using the stylus, 3-Way Thumb-Wheel, or the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel of your HP iPAQ to the required volume level. To mute system sounds, tap Off. 3. TIP: To switch to silent mode, press the Vibrate key on the top of your HP iPAQ. Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Sounds & Notifications. You can also set a specific sound for a specific event. 1. 2. On the Sounds tab, choose how you want to be notified by selecting the appropriate check boxes. 3. On the Notifications tab, in the Event list, tap an event name and choose how you want to be notified by selecting the appropriate check boxes. You can choose from several options, such as a special sound, a message, or a flashing light. NOTE: Turning off sounds and the LED notification helps conserve battery power. Change the power management settings 1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > System > Power. Tap Advanced and select the length of time the HP iPAQ stays on when using battery power or AC power. Dim or adjust the brightness of the backlight Tap Start > Settings > System > Backlight. Tap Battery power or External Power. Select the backlight options of your choice. You can set the backlight to dim after a specified amount of time has elapsed. 1. 2. 3. You can also increase or decrease the brightness of the backlight. 1. You can also change the brightness by tapping Start > Settings > System > Backlight >

Brightness. 2. Move the slider on the Backlight screen up or down to set the required level of brightness. NOTE: You can also change the brightness setting from the Today screen by tapping the

(Backlight) icon. TIP: You can also use the 3-Way Thumb-Wheel or the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel to move the slider. Customize your HP iPAQ 15 Install and remove programs To install programs on your HP iPAQ:

1. Use the mini-USB synchronization cable to connect your HP iPAQ to your computer. 2. 3. Check the screen of your HP iPAQ to see if any further steps are necessary to complete the Follow the instructions in the Installation Wizard provided with the program you want to install. program installation. Tap Start > Settings > System > Remove Programs. Select the check box for the program(s) you want to remove, and then tap Remove. To remove programs from your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. NOTE: By removing a program from your HP iPAQ, you might increase available memory on the device. You can also remove the unused programs from your device to increase the available memory. If programs are lost from your HP iPAQ for any reason, most of them can be re-installed using any synchronization software. On your computer, click Options > Add/Remove Programs > check the program to be added > click OK. Open and close programs You do not need to exit a program to open another or to conserve memory. The system manages memory automatically. To open a program, tap Start, and then tap the program you want from the list. If you do not see the program you want, tap Start > Programs. In most cases, programs automatically stop to free required memory. However, you can choose to close programs manually. 1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > System > Memory > Running Programs. In the Running Programs list, tap the program you want to close, and then tap Stop. Set alarms and clocks To set alarm on your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Tap Start > Settings > System > Clock & Alarms > Alarms. Tap <Description> to enter a name for the alarm. Tap the day of the week for the alarm. You can select multiple days by tapping each required day. Tap the Time tab and set the time for the alarm.

(Alarm) icon to specify the type of alarm. You can choose single sound or a repeating Tap sound. If you choose to play a sound, tap the list next to the Play sound check box, and then tap the sound you want to set. 6. To set time on your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > System > Clock & Alarms > Time. Select Home to set the time zone, local time, and date when you are in your home country. Select Visiting to set these options while traveling. 16 Chapter 5 Learn the basics Shortcut menus A shortcut menu is displayed when you tap and hold an item. This menu displays the most common commands for a specific item. For example, you can delete an appointment or send a text message to a contact by using commands on a shortcut menu. When the shortcut menu displays, tap the action you want to perform. To close a shortcut menu without performing an action, tap anywhere outside the menu. Display the clock in title bar When viewing certain programs, the clock might not be displayed in the title bar. To display the clock in the title bar of all programs:

1. 2. On the More tab, tap to select the Display the clock on the title bar in all programs check box. Tap Start > Settings > System > Clock & Alarms. Create and assign a category In the Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks programs, you can use categories to organize and group your appointments, contacts, and tasks. 1. 2. Do one of the following:

From the list, select an existing item or create a new one. For an existing item in Calendar, open the appointment and tap Menu > Edit > Categories. For an existing item in Tasks, open the task and tap Edit > Categories. For an existing item in Contacts, open the contact and tap Menu > Edit > Categories. NOTE: To assign a category to a contact, the contact should be saved on the phone memory. For a new item in Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks, select Categories. Select the required check box (Business, Holiday, Personal, or Seasonal) and tap ok to assign the category. Tap ok to return to the appointment, task, or contact. 4. NOTE: To create a new category, tap New and assign a name to the category for a contact, task, or an appointment. The new category is assigned automatically to the item. 3. Adjust the speed for scrolling through items in a list To change the speed at which scrolling occurs:

1. 2. Under Delay before first repeat, move the slider to reduce or increase the time that elapses before Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Buttons > Up/Down Control. scrolling begins. 3. Under Repeat rate, move the slider to change the time it takes to scroll from one item to the next. View the Operating System (OS) information Tap Start > Settings > System > About. View the Operating System (OS) information 17 The OS version gets displayed on the screen. Lock and unlock your HP iPAQ

(Answer/Send) key on the keyboard. Press Tap Menu > Options To lock the phone:

1. 2. 3. On the Phone screen, select the Require PIN when phone is used check box. 4. 5. 6. Reenter the new PIN for confirmation and tap Enter for verification. NOTE: You can also access the Phone screen by tapping Start > Settings > Personal > Phone. Tap Change PIN. Enter a Personal Identification Number (PIN) and tap Enter. Enter the PIN to access your device. Press Tap Menu > Options. To unlock the phone:

1. 2. 3. 4. Clear the Require PIN when phone is used check box and tap ok. NOTE: You can place an emergency call at anytime, without entering the PIN.

(Answer/Send) key on the keyboard. Battery saving tips You can adjust the settings on your HP iPAQ to fit your individual needs and to help your battery last as long as possible between charges. Here are some recommendations to conserve battery life:

Sounds Every time you are notified of an event, battery power is consumed. Tap Start >

Settings > Personal > Sounds & Notifications to turn off any unnecessary notifications. Auto Turn Off the Backlight Tap Start > Settings > System > Backlight. Specify a short amount of wait before turning off the backlight. On the Battery Power tab, set Turn off backlight if device is not used for to 10 seconds. Turn off Bluetooth and WLAN Always turn off Bluetooth and WLAN when not in use. HP also offers a variety of accessories to keep your HP iPAQ charged when you are out of the office for extended time periods. These include the mini-USB synchronization cable and travel adapter. Use original HP batteries and chargers to charge your HP iPAQ. To check the battery power, tap Start > Settings > System > Power. NOTE:

WARNING! Removing the battery from your HP iPAQ before turning it off might corrupt data present on your HP iPAQ. In case of a battery drain out, you will loose any unsaved data on your iPAQ. 18 Chapter 5 Learn the basics 6 Use your Business Navigator Use the keypad Smart-Touch Navigation wheel Use the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel to navigate through on-screen menus, play songs, change settings, and view information. Move your finger lightly around the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel to scroll through a list. To disable Smart-Touch Navigation wheel:

1. 2. NOTE: To disable the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel , press and hold the ok key on the left panel of Tap Start > Settings > System > Keyboard. Select the Disable Smart Wheel function check box and tap ok. your HP iPAQ. Once you disable the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel, the displays on the top of the screen. To enable the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel, press and hold the ok key on the left panel of your HP iPAQ.

(Wheel Lock) icon Answer/Send key Press the

(Answer/Send) key to access the Dialer screen as well as make and receive calls. End key Press the

(End) key to end a call and quit the Dialer screen. Enter key Press the the next line while entering text by pressing the

(Enter) key.

(Enter) key to open an application from any screen. You can also make a call or move on Back space key Press the when the cursor is not in the input-field, pressing the key takes you to the previous web page.

(Back space) key to back space and clear text or characters one at a time. When browsing, Softkeys Press the left softkey to open the HP iPAQ Shortcuts application and the right softkey to open the Messaging application. 3-Way Thumb-Wheel Use the 3-Way Thumb-Wheel to navigate through on-screen menus, play songs, change settings, and view information. Press the 3-Way Thumb-Wheel to select an application. You can also use the 3-Way Thumb-Wheel to increase or decrease the speaker volume during a call by moving it up and down. Use the keypad 19 Call features Make a call Press the

(Answer/Send) key. 1. 2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the number you want to call. 3. Tap Talk. TIP: You can also make a call by dialing the numbers using the keypad, and then pressing the

(Enter) key. Answer a call

(Answer/Send) key. To answer a call, press the When you receive a call, you can answer or ignore the call. When the phone stops ringing, the caller might be sent to Voice Mail, depending on the settings provided by your mobile phone service provider. To ignore the call, tap Ignore on the on-screen keypad or press the NOTE: To switch to silent mode during a incoming call, press the Vibrate key on the top of your HP iPAQ.

(End) key. Call waiting

(Answer/Send) key. Press the Tap Menu > Options > Services. Tap Call Waiting > Get Settings Use Call Waiting to be notified of incoming calls when you are on another call. To turn on Call Waiting:

1. 2. 3. 4. Under When calls are waiting, tap Notify me. To use Call Waiting to answer an incoming call during a phone conversation:

1. 2. Press the Press the answer the call. Tap Swap to switch between the calls. 3.

(Answer/Send) key to move the current phone call to call waiting.

(Answer/Send) key to answer the incoming call or tap Ignore if you do not want to Redial a number To redial the last number, press the

(Answer/Send) key twice. Call a contact You can call a number stored in the contact list. As you enter a contact's name, the HP iPAQ searches the Contacts, Call History, Speed Dial lists, and the SIM card to find a matching name and number. 20 Chapter 6 Use your Business Navigator Make a call from the Today screen To make calls from the Today screen:

1. Use the keyboard to enter the contact name. 2. 3. In case there is more than one contact with the same name, scroll to select the required contact. Press the

(Answer/Send) key to make the call. Make a call from the contacts You can select a person's name from your contact's list and press the

(Answer/Send) key to place the call. If a contact has more than one phone number, such as Work, Home, and Fax, do the following:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Contacts. Scroll to the contact name. Scroll to the required number and press the TIP:

searches the entire contact's list to display the name. If you have a long list of contacts, enter the first few letters of a contact's name. Your HP iPAQ

(Answer/Send) key to place a call. Change the default number for a contact The Mobile phone number is set as the default number for a contact. 1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Contacts. Scroll to the required contact number. Scroll and select to change the default number. Make emergency calls You can make calls to emergency service numbers, even if you have locked the SIM card and/or the HP iPAQ. Your service provider programs one or more emergency phone numbers, such as 911 or 112, which you can call under any circumstances, even when your HP iPAQ is locked or the SIM card is not inserted. To dial an emergency number:

1. 2. Use the on-screen keypad to dial the local emergency number. 3. NOTE: Emergency numbers vary by country/region. Your HP iPAQ's preprogrammed emergency number(s) might not work in all locations, and sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed due to network, environmental, or interference issues.

(Answer/Send) key to place the call.

(Answer/Send) key. Press the Press the Make calls using speed dials You can dial phone numbers quickly by assigning speed dial numbers. You can choose speed dial entries from 2-99. The speed dial entry 1 is often reserved to set up or dial your Voice Mail after the initial setup. NOTE: The Speed Dial feature is available only for phone numbers stored in the contact's list. Call features 21 Select a speed dial number from 2-99 in the Location box and tap ok. To create a speed dial shortcut:

(Answer/Send) key > Speed Dial. 1. Press the 2. Scroll to the required contact and tap the contact. 3. On the screen, tap Menu > Add to Speed Dial 4. NOTE: You can also assign speed dial by tapping Start > Contacts, select a contact and tap Menu > Add to Speed Dial TIP: You can also assign speed dial numbers to Web addresses and e-mail addresses that are stored in the Contacts on your HP iPAQ. To make a speed dial call:

1. 2. On the screen keypad, tap and hold the number you assigned as a speed dial entry. For two-digit

(Answer/Send) key. Press the speed dial numbers, press the first digit and press and hold the second digit of the number. Voice mail Press the 1. 2. On the screen keypad, tap and hold 1 to automatically call Voice Mail.

(Answer/Send) key. NOTE: You might need to set up the Voice Mail shortcut. Handsfree function You can turn the speaker on during a call to use the handsfree function. On the screen, tap Speaker On to turn the earpiece off. Monitor phone usage Call history stores the duration of your last call, the total number of calls made and received, calls by type, and a lifetime counter. You can use call history to keep track of your calling patterns, to help you choose a calling plan, or estimate your monthly billing. 1. 2. Tap Start > Phone > Call History. Tap the icon next to the required number to view the call details. Make data calls Use connections settings to set up General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), dial-up, Virtual Private Network (VPN), proxy, and WLAN connections to connect to the Internet or your corporate network. With a data connection, you can browse the Web, download e-mail, or synchronize with the server without using wires. NOTE: Your HP iPAQ has already been configured to allow you to browse and chat. Contact your service provider for information on mobile Internet plans, configuring e-mail or wireless synchronizing with the server. 22 Chapter 6 Use your Business Navigator Mute a call You can mute the microphone during an active call. On making a call the other party will not be able to hear anything you say, but you can still hear the other party. To mute the microphone during a call:

Tap Mute on the Dialer screen. Put a call on hold During a call, you can put the call on hold and dial another number or answer an incoming call. If you have more than one call on the line, you can switch between calls. To put a call on hold, tap Hold. To switch between calls, tap Swap. Make a conference call Tap Talk. Press the

(Answer/Send) key. To make a conference call:

1. 2. On the screen keypad, dial the required number. 3. 4. Once you are connected, tap Hold. 5. Dial the second number, and then tap Talk. 6. Once you are connected, tap Menu > Conference. NOTE: To add more parties to the conference call, dial each number, connect, and then tap Menu >

Conference. Make a call from a hyperlink phone number Use a hyperlinked phone number to quickly dial a phone number from an e-mail or text message. A hyperlinked phone number is underlined in the same manner as a Web site address. From an e-mail or text message containing a hyperlinked phone number:

1. 2. Tap the phone number. Tap Call to dial the number. Dial international numbers To make an international call, enter a country code before the phone number. 1. On the screen, tap and hold 0 until the plus (+) sign displays. 2. NOTE: You can also insert a plus (+) sign into a contact's phone number for quick dialing. Enter the country code and phone number. Call features 23 Call history Manage calls using call history Call history provides the time and duration of all incoming, outgoing, and missed calls, a summary of total calls, and has easy access to notes taken during a call. On the screen tap Start > Phone > Call History to view the history of all dialed and received calls. Tap Menu > Filter and select a different view to change the call history view. NOTE: Tap Menu > Call Timers to view call durations. The All Calls timer cannot be reset. Tap Call History > Menu > Delete All Calls to clear the entire Call History. Make calls using call history Press the Use call history to quickly call someone whom you recently called or someone who recently called you. 1. 2. On the screen keypad tap Call History. 3. Tap the required number to place a call.

(Answer/Send) key. View call details 1. On the screen, tap Call History. 2. The date and timestamp, as well as the duration of the call, are displayed. Tap the phone number of the contact to view the details. Voice commands Use voice commands to look up contacts, dial a contact by name, get calendar information, play and control your music, as well as launch applications on your HP iPAQ. Press the HP Voice Commander key to launch the HP Voice Commander application. Wait for the audio cue to say Say command, and then begin saying a command into the microphone. NOTE: You can also launch the HP Voice Commander by pressing the hookswitch on your HP iPAQ headset. To Say Call a contact saved in the contact list Call followed by the name of the contact and home/work/

mobile Find a contact saved in the contact list Find followed by the name of the contact To call numbers not stored in the contact list Digit Dial followed by the digits in the number, Redial to redial the number, and Callback to call the last dialed number Important! The Digit Dial feature might not be available in all countries/regions. To play, pause, and/or resume music Play Music/Pause/Resume To play an existing music file Play followed by the name of the music file 24 Chapter 6 Use your Business Navigator To play the previous or the next song in the playlist Previous/Next To open an application View appointments Start followed by the application name

<Today's/Tomorrow's/This Week's appointments> to list the appointments for the day, next day, or the present week Read messages, e-mails, check Call History Read<SMS/E-mail>/Call history View time View the different set of commands What time is it?

What can I say?

To close HP Voice Commander application Goodbye To compose an e-mail To compose an audio e-mail Compose E-mail To (Contact) Compose Audio E-mail To (Contact) to start recording an audio message To change profiles Set followed by the name of the profile to set the profile To dial a number using speed dial Speed Dial followed by the digit assigned to the number To record an audio note To see all reminders To schedule a call Start Recording to open the voice recorder and start recording Reminder Schedule A Call To (Contact) to call a contact Check connection and signal strength When you slide your SIM card into your HP iPAQ, your unit automatically connects to your mobile phone service provider's network. The the vertical bars, the better the connection.

(Signal strength) icon indicates that you are connected. The more Change the SIM PIN

(Answer/Send) key. Press the Tap Menu > Options. For security purposes, the SIM PIN protects your HP iPAQ against unauthorized access. You can assign a password to protect your device and information. Your first PIN comes from your wireless service provider. 1. 2. 3. Under Phone, tap Change PIN. 4. 5. 6. 7. To enter a PIN before you make calls, check Require PIN when phone is used. NOTE: Emergency calls can be placed at any time, without entering a PIN. Enter your current PIN. Tap Enter. Enter and confirm your new PIN. Tap ok. Check connection and signal strength 25 Change service settings Change phone service settings Once your phone service is set up through your mobile phone service provider, you can change service settings on your HP iPAQ. For example, you might want to block certain types of incoming and/or outgoing calls, forward incoming calls to a different phone number, be notified of incoming calls when you are already in a phone session, or let others know your identity when making calls. To change phone service settings:

1. 2. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Services. 3. 4. Make appropriate changes and tap ok. Tap the service you want to change, and then tap Get Settings.

(Answer/Send) key. Press the Forward calls 1. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Services. 2. 3. 4. You can set numbers for the following:

Tap Call Forwarding > Get Settings. Select the Forward all incoming phone calls check box. Enter the phone number that is to receive the forwarded calls. No answer phone cannot be answered. Unavailable phone is off. Busy line is busy. Configure caller ID 1. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Services. 2. 3. 4. To prevent your identity from being displayed to others, tap No one. Tap Caller ID > Get Settings. Tap Everyone. Tap ok. Block calls 1. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Services. 2. 3. Tap Call Barring > Get Settings. Select the type of calls you want to block. Set up voice mail or text messaging center number To use voice mail or send text messages (SMS), enter the correct voice mail or text message phone number in phone settings. 26 Chapter 6 Use your Business Navigator NOTE: Sending text messages is not included in all network service plans. Ask your mobile service provider if your plan includes this service. 1. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Services. 2. 3. 4. If you do not know the correct voice mail or text message phone numbers, contact your mobile phone service provider. Tap Voice Mail and Text Messages > Get Settings. Enter the voice mail or text message center number in the appropriate box. Tap ok. Limit calls to specific area codes or phone numbers Placeholder- more information required. Change network settings Change phone network settings In phone network settings, you can:

View available wireless phone networks. Determine the order in which your phone accesses other phone networks (if the current one is unavailable). Specify whether you want to change networks manually or automatically. To change network settings:

1. 2. NOTE: The current phone network your HP iPAQ is using is listed at the top of the screen and remains active until you change it, lose your signal, or change your SIM. Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Phone > Network. Select the network setting options you want to change. View available phone networks To view all mobile phone networks available to you:

1. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Network. 2. 3. 4. In the Network selection list, tap Manual. Tap Find Network to display all of the available mobile phone networks. Tap ok. Set preferred networks You can set preferred phone networks in the order you want your HP iPAQ to access them. For example, if your first preferred network is unavailable, your HP iPAQ tries to access your second preferred phone network. Change network settings 27 To assign network preferences:

1. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Network. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Tap Set Networks and select your preferred networks. To set the network preference order, tap Move Up or Move Down. Tap ok. In the Network screen, tap the Network selection list. Tap Automatic. Manually selecting a phone Network Sometimes you might want to control costs by knowing when connectivity for your current, selected network is unavailable. To manually select a network:

1. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Network. 2. 3. 4. In the Network selection list, tap Manual. Select the network you want to use and then tap ok. If your current network is unavailable, tap Select, and then manually select a different network. Change the ring tone and ring type Press the Change the ring tone and type to select a different sound to notify you of incoming calls. To change ring tone and ring type:

1. 2. On the screen, tap Menu > Options > Phone. 3. 4. Tap the Ring type or Ring tone list. Select the sound you want to use.

(Answer/Send) key. Take notes during a call Enter your text. To create a note during a call:

1. On the screen keypad, tap Menu > Create Note. 2. To access a note you created during a call:

1. 2. 3. A note created during a call can also be accessed from the Notes application. The note title is the phone number you were connected to when writing the note. Tap Phone > Call History on the screen. Tap and hold the name or number for the phone call entry containing the note. Tap View Note. 28 Chapter 6 Use your Business Navigator Select a frequency band automatically Your HP iPAQ has an integrated GSM/GPRS/EDGE feature that supports four different frequency bands (850/900/1800/1900) for international roaming. When traveling between countries and/or wireless network operators, this feature automatically changes the connection settings for frequency bands if the home band is unavailable. This feature is the default setting on the HP iPAQ. To avoid problems once you are out of the country, follow these tips before you leave:

Visit your mobile phone service provider's Web site to see if their service is available where you are traveling. Verify if your mobile phone account is set up for international roaming and if additional charges apply. Copy a contact from a SIM to a device When using the SIM card in multiple devices, you can copy contacts from the SIM to the new device. 1. 2. 3. 4. Tap Start > Contacts. Tap Menu > Copy to Memory. Tap OK to copy the contacts or Cancel to go back to the previous screen. Tap Start > Contacts and search for the added contacts to verify if you copied the contacts to your HP iPAQ. Add Tele-typewriter (TTY) functionality Add TTY functionality for people who are deaf or hard-of-hearing HP iPAQ products support Tele-typewriter (TTY) functionality, which allows people who are deaf or with hearing limitations to communicate using existing telephony infrastructure, including cell phones. To achieve this, separately purchased TTY devices must be connected to the telephones on both ends of a telephone call session, and the HP iPAQ must be configured for TTY use. The sending TTY device generates a distinct audio tone for every supported character, and these tones are decoded and converted back into text on the receiving TTY device. Due to the use of audio compression codecs in modern digital cell phones, these TTY audio tones might be unintentionally distorted while being transmitted through cell phones. Therefore, in order for TTY devices to continue to work in cellular networks, the cell phone must be set into a mode that optimizes the compression codec to handle TTY tones instead of the human voice. To use TTY with the HP iPAQ, an optional TTY audio adapter must be plugged into the HP iPAQ earbud jack (also called the earbud connector). This TTY audio adapter converts the pin-out of the earbud jack, which is designed for a wired earbud and stereo headphones, to the pin-out required by most TTY devices. To purchase the TTY audio adapter (part number: FA709BAC3), visit http://www.hp.com >

Handhelds & Calculators > Options and Accessories. NOTE: Because the HP iPAQ does not support internal Cellular Text Telephone Modem (CTM) conversion, the TTY device you use must contain CTM conversion, or you must use an external CTM adapter between the HP iPAQ and the TTY device. For information on connecting TTY devices or CTM adapters to the HP iPAQ, refer to the TTY device or CTM adapter manufacturers documentation. Select a frequency band automatically 29 HP is committed to developing products, services and information that are accessible to everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations. For more information, visit http://www.hp.com/accessibility. Enable TTY support NOTE: Before enabling TTY (Tele-typewriter) support on the HP iPAQ, connect a 2.5 mm connector into the earbud jack or the setting reverts back to disabled. For example, plug in the optional TTY audio adapter into the earbud jack first, as described below. Once you enable TTY support, you can remove the 2.5 mm connector and TTY remains enabled on the HP iPAQ until you disable it. 1. Connect the TTY device to the TTY audio adapter. 2. Connect the TTY audio adapter to the earbud jack (earbud connector) on the bottom of the HP iPAQ. Press the Answer/Send key on the front of the HP iPAQ to launch the screen keypad. Tap Menu > Options > TTY. Tap On. 3. 4. 5. 6. Tap ok. The mode. icon displays in the Navigation bar when it is enabled. Now you are in TTY audio 7. Connect the optional TTY device cable to the TTY audio adapter as stated in the TTY manufacturers documentation. NOTE: Do not activate TTY audio mode while a telephone call is already in progress. Make a phone call using the TTY enabled HP iPAQ Press the 1. 2. Dial the phone number of the person you are trying to reach who also has a Tele-typewriter (TTY)

(Answer/Send) key. device connected to his phone. If you are asked if you want to turn on the phone, tap Yes. NOTE:

Install a SIM card before making your first phone call. 3. When the phone call is answered, start typing on the TTY keyboard. The letters typed into the TTY device are turned into electrical signals that travel over regular telephone lines. When the signals reach their destination (another TTY device), they are converted back into letters that appear on a display screen, are printed out on paper, or both. When you are finished typing your phone conversation, the person on the other end of the line might begin typing their answers or comments to you. To end the phone call, press and hold the 4. NOTE:

decrease. Also, if you make a phone call using a Bluetooth headset while in TTY mode and insert a plug into the headphone jack, TTY audio mode activates thereby decreasing the quality of voice calls. If a normal headset is connected while TTY support is enabled, the audio quality might

(End) key. Disable TTY support 1. 2. Press the Tap Menu > Options > TTY.

(Answer/Send) key to launch the screen keypad. 30 Chapter 6 Use your Business Navigator Tap Off. Tap ok. 3. 4. NOTE:

HP recommends disabling TTY support when the HP iPAQ is not being used for TTY to allow the special network resources to be used by others. If you plan to use the HP iPAQ in both normal and Tele-typewriter (TTY) audio mode, Voice notes Create voice votes To create a stand-alone recording (voice note) or add a recording to a note:

1. 2. Do one of the following:

Tap Start > Programs > Notes. To create a stand-alone recording, record from the note list. To add a recording to a note, create or open a note. NOTE:

If the Recording toolbar does not appear, tap Menu > View Recording Toolbar. 3.

(Record) button. Tap the Speak into the microphone located at the bottom of the unit. 4. 5. When you have finished recording the note, tap the NOTE:

stand-alone recording, an displays in the note list. Also, you can create a voice note in HP Photosmart Mobile and attach the note to a picture. If you are recording in an open note, an icon displays in the note. If you are creating a

(Stop) button on the recording toolbar. Delete voice notes Tap Start > Programs > Notes. From the note list, tap and hold the note. Tap Delete. To delete a stand-alone recording voice note:

1. 2. 3. To delete a recording within a note:

1. 2. Open a note. 3. 4. Tap and hold the Tap Clear. Tap Start > Programs > Notes.

(Voice Note) icon. Listen to voice notes 1. 2. Tap Start > Programs > Notes. Tap the

(Recorded voice note) icon to hear the note. Voice notes 31 Rename voice notes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Tap Start > Programs > Notes. Tap and hold the note to rename. Tap Rename/Move. Enter the new name in the Name box. Tap ok. Configure channels Enable this feature to receive real-time news and information such as traffic news and weather reports. Check with your mobile phone service provider for availability in your area. To configure the phone broadcast channels:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. HSDPA Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Phone > More. Select the Cell Broadcast check box. Tap Setting Tap Add, and then enter the channel name and number. Tap ok. High Speed Download Packet Access (HSDPA) is an enhancement of Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) which is based on 3G technology, and offers better compression and codecs.Your HP iPAQ supports HSDPA 3.6 to 7.2 mbps that uses WCDMA for high speed downloads. HP iPAQ also supports WCDMA over three different frequency bands (850/1900/2100). When WCDMA or HSDPA is available, the device uses the technology and reverts back to GSM/GPRS/EDGE if WCDMA or HSDPA is unavailable. Differences between GSM and GPRS/EDGE/WCDMA/3G technology GSM technology is typically used for voice calls and text messaging, whereas GPRS/EDGE/WCDMA/

3G technology provides a connection to the Mobile Phone Network that can be used for Web browsing, Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS), or accessing your corporate network. NOTE: Using GPRS/EDGE/WCDMA/3G data services are typically an additional charge to your standard mobile phone service. Check with your mobile phone service provider for data services and cost. 32 Chapter 6 Use your Business Navigator 7 Camera Use the camera Use the built-in digital camera on your HP iPAQ to capture and view photos. Capture photos Press the Camera key or tap Start > Programs > Camera. You can capture photos and store them in your HP iPAQ or storage card. 1. 2. Use the 3-Way Thumbwheel key to zoom in or zoom out. 3. 4. To decrease or increase brightness, move the horizontal slider at the bottom of the screen. Press the Camera key to capture a photo and automatically save it in File Explorer > My Documents > My Pictures. NOTE: Tap the

(Flash) button to enable flash while taking pictures. View photos Tap Start > Programs > Photosmart Mobile. To view photos captured on your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. Navigate to a required folder. 3. Tap the folder to open it and tap the required photo. Change camera settings Change brightness settings 1. 2. Tap Start > Programs > Camera. Tap the

(Settings) button. 3. On the Basic tab, select Brightness from the White Balance list. 4. You can adjust the brightness within a range of -10000 to +10000. Select the required value for brightness from the adjacent list and tap ok. Change resolution settings 1. 2. Tap Start > Programs > Camera. Tap the

(Settings) button. 3. On the Photo tab, select the required settings from the Resolution list. 4. Make the necessary changes and tap ok. Use the camera 33 The Resolution settings can be changed to:

QVGA 320 X 240 VGA 640 X 480 1M 1280 X 960 1.3M 1280 X 1024 2M 1600 X 1200 3M 2048 X 1536 NOTE: The larger the resolution you choose, the more the storage space required and it might take longer to send such photos by Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS), e-mail, or Bluetooth. Change mode settings 1. 2. Tap Start > Programs > Camera. Tap the

(Settings) button. 3. On the Photo tab, select the required setting from the Capture mode list. 4. Make the necessary changes and tap ok. Mode settings can be changed to:

Normal Set this default mode when you capture photos. Timer Set the self-timer to the time duration after which the camera captures photo on pressing the Camera key. Burst Set the maximum number of photos that can be taken at a time. Frame Set the type of frame. Panorama horizontal Set to panorama horizontal to capture vast landscapes, city skylines, and other landscapes. Panorama vertical Placeholder- more information required. NOTE: You can also tap the

(Frame) button to change the frame type. Video recorder Record videos Tap Start > Programs > Camera. You can use the built-in camcorder on your HP iPAQ to create short videos and share them with your friends and family. 1. 2. Tap Press the Camera key to start recording. Press the Camera key again to stop recording.

(Video) button to go into the video mode. 3. 34 Chapter 7 Camera Configure video format Tap Start > Programs > Camera, and then tap the On the Video tab, change one of the following:

Select resolution from the Resolution list. You can change the settings to:

(Settings) button. QCIF(176 X 144) QVGA(320 X 240) NOTE: Select the Record voice check box to record voice while recording videos. Transfer images Use GPRS When the phone radio is turned on for the first time, the HP iPAQ DataConnect application detects the mobile phone service provider and automatically populates the MMS settings on the HP iPAQ. To transfer pictures using MMS:

1. 2. 3. 4. Tap Start > Messaging > MMS. Tap Menu > New. Tap the picture or the video you want to attach. Tap Send. Use Bluetooth You can do the following to transfer images from your HP iPAQ to other devices:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Programs > Photosmart Mobile. Scroll and select a picture. Tap Menu > Beam picture Select the device and tap Tap to send. NOTE: You should have the Bluetooth connection on to transfer images. Transfer images 35 8 HP Photosmart Mobile HP Photosmart Mobile You can use HP Photosmart Mobile to:

View pictures stored on your HP iPAQ or a storage card. Add voice or text notes to pictures. Print pictures. View a slideshow. Send pictures via MMS, e-mail attachments, or Bluetooth. Associate a picture with a contact. Assign a picture to the Today screen background. Upload an image via e-mail to snapfish. Attach a voice note to a picture To attach a voice note to a picture:

1. 2. 3.

(Cassette) button. Tap the Tap Start > Programs > Photosmart Mobile. Tap the thumbnail to which you want to add a voice note. 4. 5. 6. Tap the

(Record) button on the recording toolbar. Speak into the microphone to record the voice note and tap the

(Stop) button when finished. Tap the

(Cassette) button again to close the recording toolbar. E-mail pictures 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Tap Start > Programs > Photosmart Mobile. Tap the thumbnail to be sent via e-mail. NOTE:

If the media file is protected by Digital Rights Management (DRM), you would not be able to view or hear it. DRM is a software that enables secure distribution and prevents illegal distribution of pictures, videos, music, movies, and ring tones over the Internet. For more information on DRM, refer to the onscreen Help by tapping Start > Help and search for DRM. Tap Menu > Send > E-mail Attachment. Select the Reduce sent photo size to check box, and then select the reduction in resolution. Tap Next. 36 Chapter 8 HP Photosmart Mobile 6. 7. 8. Enter the appropriate e-mail address or use Contacts by tapping Menu > Add Recipient. Enter other appropriate information, such as an e-mail title and message. Tap Send. Snapfish Snapfish feature enables you to upload images from your HP iPAQ to your Snapfish account via your e-mail account. 1. 2. 3. 4. Tap Start > Programs > Photosmart Mobile. Tap the thumbnail to be sent via Snapfish. Tap Menu > Send > Snapfish. Select the Reduce sent photo size to check box, and then select the required reduction in resolution. Tap Next. Select the appropriate e-mail account in the Select e-mail account list and tap Send. NOTE: To get more information about Snapfish feature, tap Help. 5. 6. NOTE:

e-mail with a link to a Web page that allows you to register an account. If the e-mail account used to send the photo to Snapfish is not registered, you will receive an View a slideshow To view a slideshow:

1. 2. Tap Start > Programs > Photosmart Mobile. Tap the

(Slideshow) button at the bottom of the screen. 3. Tap the screen to view the

(Forward),

(Backward),

(Stop), and

(Pause) buttons. Snapfish 37 9 Notes Write a note 1. Tap Start > Programs > Notes. NOTE: Writing must be selected as the default input mode. Tap New. 2. 3. Write your text on the screen. 4. When finished, tap ok to return to the note list. To select handwritten text, tap and hold next to the writing. As soon as dots appear and before they form a complete circle, quickly drag across the writing. If a letter crosses three ruled lines, it is treated as a drawing rather than text. Create a copy of a note Tap Start > Programs > Notes. Tap the note you want to copy. Select the text on the screen, tap Menu > Copy. To create a copy of a note:

1. 2. 3. 4. Open the required note from the note list or a new note to which the selected content is to be copied. 5. If you paste the contents in a new note, a copy of the note displays in the note list. Tap Menu > Paste. Create a voice note To create a stand-alone recording (voice note) or add a recording to a note:

1. 2. Do one of the following:

Tap Start > Programs > Notes. If the recording toolbar does not appear, tap Menu > View Recording Toolbar. To create a stand-alone recording, record from the note list. To add a recording to a note, create or open a note. NOTE:

Tap Record. Speak into the microphone located at the bottom of the unit. 3. 4. 5. When finished recording the note, tap Stop on the recording toolbar. 6. When finished, tap ok to return to the note list. 38 Chapter 9 Notes If recording in an open note, an icon appears in the note. If creating a stand-alone recording, NOTE:

an icon appears in the note list. Also, you can create a voice note in HP Photosmart Mobile and attach the note to a picture. Create a voice note 39 10 Storage cards Use storage cards Use optional storage cards for:

Expanding the memory of your HP iPAQ Adding functionality NOTE: Storage cards are not included with your HP iPAQ, and must be purchased separately. To locate information about storage cards, visit http://www.hp.com/go/ipaqaccessories. Insert a storage card 1. Remove the battery cover, slide the storage card holder and open it. 2. Place the card in the storage card holder with the metal area inserted first. 3. Slide back the storage card holder until it fits into place. If you have trouble inserting a storage card, try the following:

Make sure you are not inserting the card at an angle. Make sure you insert the connection area (the metal area) first. Remove a storage card To remove a micro Secure Digital (SD) storage card from the storage slot on the HP iPAQ:

1. Close all programs that are using the storage card. 2. 3. Remove the battery. Press and hold the Power key to turn off your HP iPAQ. 40 Chapter 10 Storage cards 4. Slide the storage slot cover and open it. 5. Remove the storage card from the storage card slot. NOTE: HP recommends inserting the protective plastic card that came with your HP iPAQ into the storage slot when not in use. View content of a storage card Tap Start > Programs > File Explorer. Tap Up, then select the storage card folder to see a list of files and folders. Use File Explorer to view the files that are located on your optional storage card. 1. 2. If the HP iPAQ does not recognize your storage card, try the following:

Make sure to install any drivers that came with the storage card. Reset the HP iPAQ by using the stylus to lightly press the Reset button. View content of a storage card 41 11 Synchronization Synchronization software If your computer is running Windows XP or an earlier version, synchronization settings are managed through Microsoft ActiveSync. Microsoft ActiveSync 4.5 is available on the Getting Started CD. You can also visit http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile for more information or to download Microsoft ActiveSync. If your computer is running Windows Vista, synchronization settings are managed through Windows Mobile Device Center (WMDC). WMDC 6.1 is available on the Getting Started CD. You can also visit http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile to download WMDC. Copy files You can copy files to and from the computer using ActiveSync. To copy files using ActiveSync:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using the mini-USB synchronization cable. 2. On the computer, select Start > Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. 3. 4. Double-click Windows Mobile-Based Device. 5. Open Windows Explorer on your computer and locate the files to be copied. 6. Drag and drop the files between your HP iPAQ and the computer. ActiveSync converts the files so In the ActiveSync window, select Explore. that they can be used by the Office Mobile programs, if necessary. NOTE: You cannot copy preinstalled files or system files. 7. Drag and drop your files between your HP iPAQ and your computer. ActiveSync converts the files so that they can be used by the Office Mobile programs, if necessary. To copy files using WMDC:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to the computer and wait for WMDC to launch automatically. 2. Click File Management to open the Mobile Device folder for your device. 3. In the Mobile Device folder, navigate and select the file that you want to copy on your device or computer. Move the files directly into My Documents on your HP iPAQ (or into a folder inside My Documents). Migrate data from Palm Desktop to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6 If you used a Palm OS based device before purchasing your HP iPAQ, you need to migrate your data from the Palm Desktop software to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6. 42 Chapter 11 Synchronization To migrate data from Palm Desktop to Windows Mobile 6:

1. 2. Ensure that you have Microsoft Outlook 98 or higher installed on your computer. Insert the Companion CD that came with your Palm unit into your computer's CD-ROM drive. From the Discover Your Handheld screen, select Install Microsoft Conduits. Alternatively, you may reinstall the Palm Desktop software. During the configuration process, select Synchronize your handheld with Microsoft Outlook and Palm Desktop software. NOTE: Microsoft Outlook must be set as your default e-mail program to properly synchronize with the Palm Desktop software. If you need to change your settings, open Microsoft Outlook, then click Tools > Options > Other tab and check the Make Outlook the default program for E-mail, Contacts, and Calendar check box. Click Apply > OK, and then restart your computer. 3. Use the HotSync software located on the Companion CD that came with your Palm unit to synchronize your Palm information with Outlook. Refer to the instructions that came with your Palm unit for help installing or using HotSync. 4. When Outlook is synchronized with your Palm device, uninstall Hotsync from your computer. Click Start > Control Panel > double-click Add or Remove Programs. Select Palm Desktop, then click Remove. Follow the on-screen instructions. Insert the Getting Started CD into your computers CD-ROM drive and follow the on-screen instructions to install ActiveSync on your computer and create a partnership between your HP iPAQ and your computer. 5. Wireless Synchronization Cost Saving Tips How you manage the cost of synchronizing without wires from your HP iPAQ depends on your priorities. To Do this Reduce network connection or data transfer costs Extend battery life Keep your information up to date Increase the time between scheduled synchronizations, or synchronize manually. Check the details of your rate plan. Schedule synchronization less frequently or synchronize manually. During periods of high mail volume, schedule synchronization at regular but frequent intervals. During periods of low mail volume, schedule synchronization as items arrive. NOTE: The device power-down timer is reset each time you synchronize. If you schedule a synchronization interval that is smaller than the time interval set for the device to automatically power down, the device never turns off to save battery power. Troubleshoot synchronization Issues Following is a list of symptoms that might indicate synchronization issues:

No ActiveSync tone plays (or a gray icon displays), and there is no activity in the ActiveSync window on your computer. WMDC does not launch even after installation. ActiveSync tone plays, and the ActiveSync icon on your computer changes to a swirling green icon. The Retrieving settings message displays on your computer, but the ActiveSync connection drops prior to establishing the partnership. Wireless Synchronization Cost Saving Tips 43 ActiveSync is searching for a connection but cannot establish one. (The green icon on your computer continues to spin.) Synchronization has been established between your HP iPAQ and computer but connection is dropped. (The green icon on your computer stops spinning and grays out.) Firewall or other network protection software message box is displayed for ActiveSync to access the network or Internet. Following is a list of troubleshooting tips if you experience difficulty while synchronizing your HP iPAQ and computer. Try the following solutions to troubleshoot any synchronization issues:

Check the OS on your computer before you begin synchronizing information between your HP iPAQ and computer. The synchronization method varies depending on the OS running on the computer. If your computer is running Windows XP or an earlier version, synchronization settings are managed through Microsoft ActiveSync. Microsoft ActiveSync 4.5 is available on the Getting Started CD.Visit http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile for more information or to download Microsoft ActiveSync. If your computer is running Windows Vista, synchronization settings are managed through Windows Mobile Device Center. Visit http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile to download Windows Mobile Device Center. NOTE: HP does not guarantee the accurate functionality of any third party applications with Windows Vista. If you are running ActiveSync 4.5 or later and personal firewall software on your computer, please add ActiveSync to the firewall program's exception list.

(Firewall software, such as Sygate Personal Firewall, TrendMicro PC-cillin Internet Security 2005, Norton Personal Firewall, McAfee Personal Firewall, or Zone Alarm Security Suite might block synchronization.) Refer to the documentation that came with your firewall program to determine how to add ActiveSync 4.5 or later to the program's exception list. To further troubleshoot a firewall application and enable ActiveSync 4.5 or later, visit: http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile. During the ActiveSync installation, if you inadvertently left the Microsoft Exchange Server option box checked and are not planning to connect to an Exchange server, follow these steps:

Connect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Make sure an ActiveSync connection is established. On your computer, click Start > All Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. Click Tools > Options. Clear the boxes for the sync items listed under the Server group. Select the check boxes under the Computer group for those items you want to synchronize. Disconnect your HP iPAQ from your computer and wait for the ActiveSync message confirming that your device is no longer connected. Reconnect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Wait to see if your HP iPAQ connects to your computer. On your computer, in ActiveSync application, select File > Connection Settings. Confirm that USB is selected as a potential connection method. Connect your HP iPAQ to a different USB port on your computer. Check your mini-USB synchronization cable. Consider using another mini-USB synchronization cable if one is available to you. 44 Chapter 11 Synchronization Try synchronizing via a Bluetooth connection. Refer to the printed or CD-based documentation that came with your HP iPAQ for specific instructions. Once your computer and HP iPAQ restart, reconnect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Uninstall ActiveSync from your computer and then reinstall it. To uninstall ActiveSync from your computer, click Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. Then click Remove > Yes. After trying the above solutions without any success in solving your connection problem, perform a factory reset on your HP iPAQ using the HP iPAQ Setup Assistant. You can reinstall your applications on your HP iPAQ after the hard or clean reset is complete by using ActiveSync on your computer. After your HP iPAQ is synchronized properly, go to ActiveSync on your computer and select Tools > Add/Remove Programs, and then select any programs you want to reinstall. Customized links in WMDC After connecting your device to a Windows Vista system using WMDC 6.1, an image of HP iPAQ 600 Series Business Navigator pops up on the left of the Windows Mobile Device Center screen. You can set up your device to synchronize the Outlook contacts, e-mail, and other information on your device or just connect the device by skipping the setup process. After the device synchronizes with your computer, the following links are displayed on your computer:

Programs and Services Pictures, Music and Video File Management Mobile Device Settings To view a list of customized links, navigate to Programs and Services. Click more>> to view additional links for the various HP services and click <<back to go back to the previous screen. Customized links in WMDC 45 12 Tasks Set start and due dates for a task 1. 2. 3. 4. Tap Start > Programs > Tasks. Tap the task you want to set start and due dates for. Tap Edit and do one or both of the following:

Tap Starts to enter a start date for the task. Tap Due to enter a due date for the task. Tap ok. Show start and due dates in the task list 1. 2. 3. 4. Tap Start > Programs > Tasks. Tap Menu > Options Select the Show start and due dates check box. Tap ok. Set options for displaying tasks on the Today screen Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Today. Tap Items, and then select the Tasks check box. Tap Tasks to access options, then tap Options If you have a large number of tasks, you might want to specify the kind of tasks that are displayed on the Today screen. 1. 2. 3. 4. Under Display number of, select the type of tasks to appear on the Today screen. 5. In the Category list, select whether to display only tasks assigned to a specific category or to display all tasks. Mark a task as completed Tap Start > Programs > Tasks. In the task list, select the check box next to the task you want to mark as completed. To mark a task as completed:

1. 2. To mark an open task as completed:

1. 2. Tap Edit. In the Status box, tap Completed. 46 Chapter 12 Tasks 13 Messaging Understand messages To send and receive e-mail messages for an e-mail account, you need to connect to the Internet or your corporate network, depending on the account. You can send and receive:

Outlook e-mail Internet e-mail through an ISP Text messages You can also access e-mail from work using a VPN connection. E-mail in the Outlook e-mail account is sent and received through synchronization with a computer using any synchronizing software or through wireless synchronization directly with an Exchange Server. Internet e-mail is sent and received by connecting to a Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3) or Internet Message Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4) e-mail server. When connecting to a POP3 or IMAP4 server, you need to use a modem to connect to your ISP. You can use an Ethernet card to connect to the local area network your e-mail server is connected to. You can also use your HP iPAQ to connect by using a cellular line connection (for example, using MMS). Text messages are sent and received through your wireless service provider using a phone number as the message address. Folder types Each messaging account has its own set of folders with five default Messaging folders:

Inbox Outbox Deleted Items Drafts Sent Items The messages you receive and send through the account are stored in these folders. You can also create additional folders for each account. The way folders work vary by type:

If you use an Outlook e-mail account, e-mail messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are synchronized automatically with your device. You can select additional folders for synchronization by assigning them designations. The folders you create and the messages you move are then mirrored on the e-mail server. If you use an MMS account or a text message account, messages are stored in the Inbox folder. If you use a POP3 account and move your e-mail messages to a folder you created, the link between the messages on the device and their copies on the e-mail server breaks. When you Understand messages 47 connect, the e-mail server detects that the messages are missing from the Inbox folder on the device and deletes them from the e-mail server. This prevents having duplicate copies of a message, but it also means that you no longer have access to messages. If you use an IMAP4 account, the folders you create and the e-mail messages you move are mirrored on the e-mail server. These messages are therefore available from any location or device. This synchronization of folders occurs whenever you connect to your e-mail server, create new folders, or rename/delete folders when connected. You can also set different download options for each folder. Synchronize E-mail When you synchronize Outlook e-mail on the computer with your device, e-mail messages are synchronized as follows:

Messages in the Inbox folder on your computer or Exchange Server are copied to the Inbox folder of the Outlook e-mail account on your device. Messages in the Outbox folder on your device are transferred to Exchange Server or Outlook and then sent from those programs. When you delete a message on your device, it is deleted from your computer or Exchange Server the next time you synchronize. The default sync settings synchronize messages from the past three days and the first 0.5 KB of each new message is downloaded. It does not download file attachments. NOTE: For more information on starting Outlook e-mail synchronization or changing synchronization settings, see ActiveSync Help on the computer or tap Contents. Text messages are not received via synchronization. Instead, they are sent to your device via your service provider. Set up messaging accounts Set up e-mail using exchange server 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Tap Start > Messaging > New E-mail Account. Enter your e-mail address in the E-mail address box, and then tap Next. Scroll and select the Exchange server option from the Your e-mail provider list. Tap Next to synchronize outlook with your organization's Exchange e-mail server. In Server address, enter the Outlook Web Access server address and tap Next. NOTE: Select This server requires an encrypted (SSL) connection check box to ensure you always send e-mail from this account using an SSL connection. Enter the User name, Password, and Domain on the Edit Server Settings screen. Select the check box for the items you want to synchronize, and tap Finish. 48 Chapter 13 Messaging Internet E-mail Create a new POP3 or IMAP4 account You must set up an e-mail account that you have with an ISP or an account that you access using a VPN server connection (typically a work account) before you can send and receive e-mail. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. You can also perform the following functions:

Tap Start > Messaging > New E-mail Account. Enter the account name and then Tap Next. Scroll and select the Internet e-mail option from the Your e-mail provider list and tap Next. Enter your name and required account name and tap Next. Enter the incoming server name and select the required account type, POP3 or IMAP4. Change the time intervals for downloading new messages. Download attachments. Limit the number of messages that are downloaded. Setting User name Password Domain Account type Account name Incoming mail Outgoing mail Require SSL connection Outgoing mail requires authentication Use separate settings Outgoing server settings User name Password Description Enter the user name assigned to you by your ISP or network administrator. This is often the first part of your e-mail address, which appears before the at sign (@). Choose a strong password. You have the option to save your password so that you do not need to enter it each time you connect to your e-mail server. Not required for an account with an ISP. Might be required for a work account. Select POP3 or IMAP4. Enter a unique name for the account, such as Work or Home. This name cannot be changed later. Enter the name of your e-mail server (POP3 or IMAP4). Enter the name of your outgoing e-mail server (SMTP). Select this to ensure you always send e-mail from this account using an SSL connection. This enables you to send personal information more securely. Note that if you select this and your ISP does not support an SSL connection, you might not be able to send e-mail. Select this if your outgoing e-mail server (SMTP) requires authentication. Your user name and password from above is used. Select this if your outgoing e-mail server requires a different user name and password than the ones you entered before. Enter your user name for the outgoing e-mail server. Enter your password for the outgoing e-mail server. Set up messaging accounts 49 Setting Domain Require SSL for outgoing mail Description Enter the domain of the outgoing e-mail server. Select this to ensure you always send e-mail from this account using an SSL connection. This enables you to send personal information more securely. Note that if you select this and your ISP does not support an SSL connection, you might not be able to send e-mail. TIP: You can set up several e-mail accounts in addition to your Outlook e-mail account. You cannot add a new account while connected. Tap Menu > Stop Send/Receive to disconnect. Change E-mail download options You can customize the following download options for each e-mail account that you have with an ISP, or any account that you access using a VPN server connection (typically a work account). You can choose:

Whether messages are downloaded automatically. How much e-mail is downloaded. If and how attachments are downloaded (IMAP4 only). Tap Start > Messaging > Menu > Options. Select the e-mail account. Tap Next until you reach Server information. Tap Options. Enter your changes on the next three screens, and tap Finish. To change the e-mail download options, do the following:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. TIP: To send and receive messages automatically, tap Connect, check for messages and enter a time interval. Connecting automatically might result in higher connection charges. To save memory, limit the number of e-mails downloaded to your device by lowering the number of days to display. To change options for an Outlook e-mail account, tap Start > Programs > ActiveSync > Menu >

Options. Delete an account Tap Start > Messaging. Tap Menu > Options. Tap and hold the account name, and tap Delete. 1. 2. 3. NOTE: You cannot delete your text message account. 50 Chapter 13 Messaging Text messaging Text messaging is the transmission of short text messages to and from a mobile phone, fax machine, and/or IP address. A single text message cannot be longer than 160 alpha-numeric characters or cannot contain pictures or graphics. Messages longer than 160 alpha-numeric characters are sent as multiple text messages. A character count is visible when text messages (New/Reply/Forward) are composed. The count also shows how many text messages are generated when the message is sent. The Text Message Service Center phone number is provided by your mobile phone service provider. Text messaging should function correctly after activating your account. To verify the number used to change the Text Message Service Center phone number, tap Start > Phone > Menu > Options >

Services > Voice Mail and Text Messages > Get Settings MMS MMS is a method of transmitting photographs, video clips, sound files, and short text messages over wireless networks. When the phone radio is turned on for the first time, the GSM/GPRS Manager application detects the mobile phone service provider and automatically populates the MMS settings on the HP iPAQ. Alternately, you can access some MMS settings by tapping Start > Messaging > Menu > Options >

Accounts > MMS > Preferences. It is not recommended to change the MMS settings provided by your mobile phone service provider unless they request the change. MMS composer With MMS composer you can create and share your own MMS messages. You can also add pictures, videos, text, and audio to your MMS messages. To access MMS application, tap Start > Messaging > MMS MMS account has its own set of folders with five default Messaging folders:

Deleted Items Drafts Inbox Outbox Sent Items To create an MMS message:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Messaging > MMS. From any MMS folder, tap Menu > New To add picture or video to the message, tap the Insert picture/video field, and then tap the required picture or video to be added. NOTE: To view to the video clip before adding, navigate to the required file and tap the button. To insert text in the message, tap the Insert text here field and type the required text. 4.

(Play) Set up messaging accounts 51 NOTE: You can also insert a smiley by tapping the the To add an audio clip to message, tap Insert audio and tap the required audio to be added.

(Favorites) icon, and templates stored in My Text by tapping the

(Smiley) icon, favorite Web link by tapping

(Text) icon. NOTE: To listen to the audio clip before adding, navigate to the required file and tap button.

(Play) To preview the MMS message, tap the

(Play) icon at the left bottom of the screen. 5. 6. NOTE: To use a pre-made message template, tap Menu > Template > New from template > OK. Select the Always choose custom check box to view a blank message automatically. NOTE: You can also add pictures, videos, and text by navigating to the required file and tapping Select. Receive attachments Tap Start > Programs > ActiveSync. Tap Menu > Options Tap E-mail > Settings, and then select Include file attachments. An attachment sent with an e-mail message or downloaded from the server is displayed below the subject of the message. Tapping the attachment opens the attachment if it has been fully downloaded or marks it for download the next time you send and receive e-mail. You can also download attachments automatically with your messages if you have an Outlook e-mail or IMAP4 e-mail account. If you have an Outlook e-mail account, do the following:

1. 2. 3. If you have an IMAP4 e-mail account with an ISP or an account that you access using a VPN server connection (typically a work account), do the following:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Tap Start > Messaging. Tap Menu > Options Tap the name of the IMAP4 account. Tap Next until you reach Server information, and tap Options Tap Next twice, and select Get full copy of messages and When getting full copy, get attachments. TIP: Embedded pictures and objects cannot be received as attachments. An embedded message can be viewed as an attachment when using IMAP4 to receive e-mail. However, this feature does not work if Transport Neutral Encapsulation Format (TNEF) is enabled so that you can receive meeting requests. To store attachments on a storage card rather than on the device, tap Start > Messaging > Menu >

Options > Storage, and select the When available, use this storage card to store attachment check box. Receive meeting requests If you receive your e-mail messages through ActiveSync, you can receive meeting requests. When connecting directly to an e-mail server, the server must be running Microsoft Exchange Server version 5.5 or later for you to receive meeting requests. 52 Chapter 13 Messaging If the server is running Microsoft Exchange Server 2000 or later, your meeting requests are automatically received in your Inbox. However, to receive meeting requests on Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5, do the following:

Ask your system administrator to activate Rich Text Format (RTF) and TNEF support for your account. With TNEF enabled, your messages that are included in other messages as attachments are not received, and you cannot know if a message has an attachment until you get the full copy. In addition, download time might be longer. Change e-mail download options if your account is not set up to receive attachments. After you are set up to receive meeting requests, do the following:

1. Open the meeting request. 2. Tap Accept, or Menu > Tentative, or Menu > Decline. If you want, you can also include a message with the response. The response will be sent the next time that you synchronize or connect to your e-mail server, and your device calendar will be updated. Create or change a signature Tap Start > Messaging. Tap Menu > Options > Signatures Select the account for which you want to create or change a signature. Select the Use signature with this account check box if it is not already selected. Select the Use when replying and forwarding check box if required. Enter a signature in the box. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. To stop using a signature, clear the Use signature with this account check box. TIP: You can use a different signature with each messaging account. Use messaging Compose and send messages 1. 2. 3. 4. In the message list, tap and select an account. Tap Menu > New. Enter the e-mail address or text message address of one or more recipients, separating them with a semicolon. To access addresses and phone numbers from Contacts, tap To. Enter your message. To quickly add common messages, tap Menu > My Text and tap the required message. To check the spelling, tap Menu > Spell Check. Tap Send. 5. 6. TIP: To set the priority, tap Menu > Message Options If you are working offline, e-mail messages are moved to the Outbox folder and are sent the next time you connect. Use messaging 53 NOTE:

Reply or forward a message 1. 2. Tap on the message to open it, and then tap Menu > Reply, Reply All, or Menu > Forward. Enter your response. To quickly add common messages, tap Menu > My Text and tap the required message. To check the spelling, tap Menu > Spell Check. Tap Send. 3. 4. NOTE:

Message. You must check the When replying to e-mail, include body option. If you want to keep the original text with the outgoing message, tap Menu > Options then tap Add an attachment to a message 1. In an open message, tap Menu > Insert and tap the item you want to attach: Picture, Voice Note, or File. 2. Select the file you want to attach or record a voice note. NOTE: Embedded objects cannot be attached to messages. Download messages The manner in which you download messages depends on the type of account you have:

To send and receive e-mail for an Outlook e-mail account, begin synchronization through ActiveSync. Text messages are automatically received when your HP iPAQ is switched on. When your HP iPAQ is switched off (in flight mode), messages are held by your service provider until the next time your HP iPAQ is turned on. TIP: By default, messages you send are not saved on your device to help conserve memory. If you want to keep copies of sent messages in the messaging list, tap Menu > Options > Message, and select the Keep copies of sent items in Sent folder check box. If your account is an Outlook e-mail or IMAP4 account, you must also select the Sent Items folder for synchronization. To do this, tap Start >

Messaging > Outlook E-mail, and then tap Menu > Tools > Manage Folders and select the check box next to the Sent Items folder. Download messages from a server 1. 2. From any account, tap Menu > Go To and tap the account you want to use. Tap Menu > Send/Receive. The messages on your device and e-mail server are synchronized. New messages are downloaded to the device Inbox folder, messages in the device Outbox folder are sent, and messages that have been deleted from the server are removed from the device Inbox folder. TIP: To read the entire message, tap Menu > Download Message while in the message window. If you are in the message list, tap and hold the message, and then tap Menu > Download Message. The message will download the next time you send and receive e-mail. This will also download message attachments if you have selected those options while setting up your e-mail account. The size column in the message list displays the local size and server size of a message. These numbers might differ because the size of a message can vary between the server and the device. 54 Chapter 13 Messaging Install an online address book Many e-mail servers, including servers running Exchange Server, can verify names with an online address book called a directory service, using a protocol known as Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP). When you create an e-mail account, the directory service of your e-mail server is added to the Address, and you are given the option to enable it. After it is enabled, Messaging checks your contact list and then the directory service to verify names that you enter in the To, Cc, and Bcc fields. To enable a directory service or if you want to use additional services, follow these steps:

1. If you are adding a new account, ask your network administrator for the name of the directory service and the server. In the message list, tap Menu > Options > Address. In the In Contacts, get e-mail addresses from list, select which e-mail address book to check in contacts. Contacts will be checked first unless you select None. If your e-mail server is already listed, select the server's directory service check box to enable it and tap ok. If your e-mail service is not listed, tap Add In the Directory name and Server boxes, enter the LDAP directory and server names. Ask your network administrator if authentication is necessary for your server. If so, select the Authentication is necessary on this server check box, and enter your user name and password. To have messaging check this service, select the Check name against this server check box. 8. TIP: To delete a service, tap and hold the service, and then tap Delete. While synchronizing your Outlook e-mail account, disable any directory services you have installed by clearing the Check name against this server check box. This helps avoid getting error messages when Messaging tries to verify names against the service that you are not connected to. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Install an online address book 55

14 Calendar Access calendar Use Calendar to schedule appointments, including meetings and other events. You can display appointments for the day on the Today screen. To access Calendar, tap Start > Calendar. Change the display of the work week You can customize your calendar for a work week to start on Sunday or Monday. You can schedule your calendar for a five to seven-day week. To change the display of the work week:

1. 2. Tap Start > Calendar. Tap Menu > Tools > Options and do one or both of the following:

To specify the first day of the week, tap Sunday or Monday in the 1st day of week box. To specify the number of days to appear in a work week, tap 5-day week, 6-day week, or 7-day week in the Week view box. Tap ok. 3. 4. Set a default reminder for all new appointments To automatically turn on a reminder for all new appointments:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Tap Start > Calendar. Tap Menu > Tools > Options > Appointments. Select the Set reminders for new items check box. Set the time for the reminder to alert you. Tap ok. Update an appointment To update an appointment on your calendar:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Calendar. Tap the appointment, then Menu > Edit to make your changes. Tap ok. 56 Chapter 14 Calendar Cancel an appointment When you delete an appointment in calendar on your HP iPAQ, it is also deleted on your computer the next time you synchronize. If the appointment has not been synchronized with a computer, it will be deleted only from your HP iPAQ. 1. 2. 3. 4. NOTE:

and select an appointment, and then tap Menu > Delete Appointment. Tap Start > Calendar. In Agenda view, select the appointment to delete. Tap Menu > Delete Appointment. Tap Yes to delete the appointment, or tap No to keep it. In other views use the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel or the 3-Way Thumb-Wheel to scroll Cancel an appointment 57 15 Contacts Create a contact Tap New and enter the contact information in Outlook Contact or SIM Contact. If your contact list has been filtered by a category when you create a contact, that category is 1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. 3. When finished, tap ok. NOTE:

automatically assigned to the new contact. If most of the contacts you create have phone numbers that begin with the same area code, in the Contacts, tap Menu > Options and enter that area code in the Area code box. If you receive a call from a number that is not listed in your contacts, you can create a contact from the call history. For more information on creating contacts, tap Start > Help. Delete a contact 1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. 3. 4. Tap and hold the contact to delete. Tap Delete Contact. Tap ok. Change contact information 1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. 3. 4. When finished, tap ok. Tap the contact. Tap Edit and enter the changes. Copy a contact 1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Change the contact information as needed and tap ok. Tap and hold the contact you want to copy. Tap Copy Contact. Tap the copy of the contact. Tap Edit. 58 Chapter 15 Contacts NOTE: The displayed category is automatically assigned to the new contact. Find a contact 1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. 3. Do one of the following:

If you are not in Name view, tap Menu > View By > Name. Begin entering a name or phone number in the provided text box until the contact you want is displayed. To show all contacts again, tap the text box and clear the text, or tap the arrow to the right of the text box. Use the alphabetical index displayed at the top of the contact list. Filter the list by categories. In the contact list, tap Menu > Filter. Then tap a category you have assigned to a contact. To show all contacts again, select All Contacts. NOTE: To search for a contact by entering a name or number, or by using the alphabetical index, you need to be in Name view. Send an E-mail message to a contact 1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. 3. 4. NOTE: To quickly add a contact's address to a new message, tap To, Cc, or Bcc line, and then tap Menu > Add Recipient. Tap the contact you want to send the message to and choose the address, if necessary. Tap the contact you want to send a message to. Tap the address you want to send a message to. Tap the account you want to send the message from. Send a text message to a contact 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In the message list, tap Menu > Go To and select the account. Tap Menu > New. Enter the e-mail address or text message address of one or more recipients, separating them with a semicolon. To access addresses and phone numbers from Contacts, tap To. Enter your message. To quickly add common messages, tap Menu > My Text and tap the required message. NOTE: To enter symbols, tap Shift using the on-screen keypad. To check the spelling, tap Menu > Spell Check. NOTE: To set the priority, tap Menu > Message Options Tap Send. 6. If you are working offline, e-mail messages are moved to the Outbox folder and will be sent the next time you connect. Find a contact 59 If you are sending a text message and want to know if it was received, before sending the message, tap Menu > Tools > Options Tap Accounts > Text Messages and select Request delivery notifications check box. Add and remove a picture To add a picture to the contact information:

1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. 3. 4. 5. Do one of the following:

Tap the contact. Tap Edit. Tap Picture. Tap the picture you want to add. Tap Camera and take a picture. To remove a picture from the contact information:

1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. 3. 4. Tap the contact. Tap Menu > Edit. Tap Menu > Remove Picture. Use the contact list There are several ways to use and customize the contact list. You can also make a call or send a message from an open contact. 1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. In the contact list, do any of the following:

To search for a contact by entering a name or number, or by using the alphabetical index, enter the name or number into the Enter a name box. To see a list of contacts employed by a specific name or company, tap Menu > View By >

Name or Company. To see a summary of information about a contact, tap the contact. From there, you can also make a call or send a message. To see a list of available actions for a contact, tap and hold the contact. NOTE: To display a greater number of contacts on the screen, tap Menu > Options, select the Show contact names only check box, and clear the Show alphabetical index check box. 60 Chapter 15 Contacts 16 Connections You can use your HP iPAQ to connect to and exchange information with other handheld devices, your computer, various network types, or the Internet. There are several ways to get connected, including:

WLAN All these connection types can be accessed by tapping Start > Settings > Connections. Bluetooth GPRS/EDGE iPAQ Wireless The iPAQ Wireless application provides centralized control of all the wireless features available on your HP iPAQ. To configure networks using iPAQ Wireless:

1.

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. Tap the To customize additional settings, select the appropriate wireless network tab. 2. The All tab is the default tab and is used to change the status of available networks. On the Phone tab, you can toggle the power status and access the phone and data settings. You can even view the operator network name and phone version information. NOTE: At the bottom of the screen, the connected state of GPRS and International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number for the GSM module is displayed. On the WLAN tab, you can toggle the power status and access the WLAN and VPN & Proxy settings. You can even view the name of the access point the adapter is connected to and the version information. NOTE: At the bottom of the screen, the IP and MAC addresses of the WLAN adapter are displayed. On the Bluetooth tab, you can toggle the power status and gain access to the Bluetooth settings and Bluetooth Manager application. You can even view the Bluetooth version information. NOTE: At the bottom of the screen, the MAC address of the Bluetooth chip is displayed. NOTE: The Help link on each tab takes you to the help topic specific to that particular option. You can turn off all the wireless networks by tapping Menu > All Wireless Off. To view version information, time stamp, and copyright notice, tap Menu > About. You can disconnect or drop all the data connections available in your on your HP iPAQ. This feature can be accessed only if a data-enabled SIM and a data connection is available. Once the data is dropped, it can only be enabled from connections settings on your HP iPAQ. iPAQ Wireless 61 WLAN With wireless access, you do not need to use cables to connect your HP iPAQ to the Internet. Instead, access points transmit data to and from your wireless device. Your HP iPAQ can connect to an 802.11b/g WLAN or connect directly to other WLAN-enabled devices. With WLAN, you can:

Access the Internet. Send and receive e-mail. Access corporate network information. Use VPNs for secure remote access. Use hotspots for wireless connectivity.

(iPAQ Wireless) icon to access the WLAN features. On the Today screen, tap the NOTE: Use of dialup and wireless Internet, e-mail, corporate networks, and other wireless communications, such as Bluetooth devices, might require separately purchased additional hardware and other compatible equipment, in addition to a standard WLAN infrastructure and a separately purchased service contract. Check with your service provider for availability and coverage in your area. Not all Web content might be available. Some Web content might require installation of additional software. WLAN Terms It is recommended that you become familiar with the following terms as you begin to use WLAN technology. Term 802.11 standard Definition An approved standard specification of radio technology from the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) used for wireless local area networks (WLANs). Device-to-computer or ad-hoc A mode that does not use access points. It provides independent peer-to-peer connectivity in a wireless LAN. Domain Name System (DNS) The way that Internet domain names are located and translated into IP addresses. It is an easy to remember name for an Internet address. Every Web site has its own specific IP address on the Internet. Encryption Hotspots An alphanumeric (letters and/or numbers) conversion process of data primarily used for protection against any unauthorized people. Public or private areas where you can access WLAN service. These wireless connections can be located, for example, at a library, cyber cafe, hotel, airport lounge, or convention center. This service can be free or sometimes requires a fee. Infrastructure This connection mode uses wireless access points to connect to networks. Automatically connect to a WLAN network When you connect to a WLAN network, the HP iPAQ automatically detects WLAN networks that are broadcasting their signal. If your WLAN network is not set to broadcast, then you have to connect to it 62 Chapter 16 Connections manually. Before trying to connect to a WLAN network, determine if authentication information is needed by contacting your network administrator. 1. Tap the

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. 2. Tap the

(WLAN) icon to turn on WLAN. 3. Once your HP iPAQ detects a WLAN network, you are asked to choose if you want to connect. Select the network you want to connect to and tap Connect. Manually connect to a WLAN network A wireless network can be added manually by entering the settings information to add the network. Before trying to connect to a WLAN network, determine if authentication information is needed by contacting your network administrator. 1. Tap

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. 2. 3. 6.

(WLAN) icon to turn on WLAN. Tap the Tap Start > Settings > Connections > iPAQ Wireless > WLAN > View WLAN Networks >

Wireless > Add New Enter the network name. 4. 5. Choose a connection method. Select The Internet to connect to the Internet through an ISP or select Work to connect to a company network in the Connects to box. You should select Work if the network requires a proxy server. Tap Next. To use authentication, select an authentication method from the Authentication list. To use data encryption, select an encryption method from the Data Encryption list. To automatically use a network key, tap The key is automatically provided check box, else enter the Network key and Key index. Find an IP address 1. 2. Tap the

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. Tap the

(WLAN) icon to turn on WLAN. 3. Connect to a network automatically or manually by tapping Start > Settings > Connections >

iPAQ Wireless > WLAN > View WLAN Networks > Network Adapters. Select a WLAN network. The WLAN IP address is displayed on the screen. 4. Delete a wireless network You can delete networks you manually entered. However, you cannot delete automatically detected networks. WLAN 63 To delete an existing or available wireless network:

1. Tap the

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. 2. 3. 4. 5.

(WLAN) icon to turn on WLAN. Tap the Tap WLAN > View WLAN Networks > Wireless. In the Configure Wireless Networks box, tap and hold the network you want to delete. Tap Remove Settings. Configure 802.1x authentication settings Before performing these steps, determine if authentication information is needed by contacting your network administrator. 1. To manually enter information, tap Start > Settings > Connections > iPAQ Wireless > WLAN >

View WLAN Networks > Network Adapters. Select the network you want to configure. For increased security, on the Configure Network Authentication screen, select Use IEEE 802.1x network access control check box and select the appropriate EAP type. 2. 3. Bluetooth Bluetooth terms It is recommended that you become familiar with the following terms as you begin to use Bluetooth technology. Term Authentication Authorization Bonding (Paired devices) Device address Device discovery Device ID Encryption Passkey Personal Information Manager (PIM) 64 Chapter 16 Connections Definition Verification of a numeric passkey before a connection or activity can be completed. Approval of a connection, access, or activity before it can be completed. Creating a trusted connection between your device and another. After a bond is created, the two devices become paired. A paired device does not require authentication or authorization. Unique electronic address of a Bluetooth device. Location and recognition of another Bluetooth device. Name that a Bluetooth device provides when discovered by another device. Method of protecting data. Code you enter to authenticate connections or activities requested by other devices. Collection of programs used to manage daily business tasks

(for example: Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks). Term Profiles Service discovery Bluetooth manager Definition Collection of Bluetooth settings. Determination of which programs you have in common with other devices. Use Bluetooth Manager to:

Establish connections Exchange business cards Display shortcuts To use Bluetooth Manager:

1. Tap the

(Bluetooth) icon to turn Bluetooth on. 2.

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. Tap the Tap Bluetooth > Bluetooth Connections. The first screen that displays is My Shortcuts. 3. When you are required to locate a device and connect to it, the Bluetooth browser searches for other Bluetooth devices. Connect to a computer via Bluetooth For best results, connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using USB to establish a synchronization before connecting via Bluetooth. 1. Follow the instructions in ActiveSync Help on the computer for configuring Bluetooth on your computer to support ActiveSync. 2. On your HP iPAQ, tap Start > Programs > ActiveSync. 3. 4. Tap Menu > Connect via Bluetooth. Make sure the device and computer are within close range. If this is the first time you have connected to this computer via Bluetooth, complete the Bluetooth wizard on your HP iPAQ and set up a Bluetooth partnership with the computer. Tap Sync. 5. 6. When finished, tap Menu > Disconnect Bluetooth. TIP: To preserve battery power, turn off Bluetooth. Use your HP iPAQ as a wireless modem with Bluetooth You can use your HP iPAQ as a wireless modem, so that you can connect your Bluetooth-enabled computer to the Internet. 1. 2. Make sure that your HP iPAQ is discoverable. Turn on Bluetooth on both, your HP iPAQ and your computer. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth > Mode. Select Make this device visible to other devices check box. Bluetooth 65 3. 4. Place the HP iPAQ within 3 meters (approximately 10 feet) of the computer and open the Bluetooth management software provided with your computer. Refer to the computer documentation on Bluetooth and search for all Bluetooth devices. Select your HP iPAQ from the resulting list and perform the necessary procedures to pair the devices via Bluetooth. 5. Once the devices are paired using the Bluetooth management software on your computer, discover the available Bluetooth services offered by the HP iPAQ and select dialup networking. 6. On your HP iPAQ, tap Accept to complete the connection, if you are asked to do so. 7. On your computer, a user name and password screen is displayed. Contact your mobile phone service provider to obtain the appropriate username and password. Enter *99 in the dial field and tap Talk. 8. NOTE: The computer initially indicates that your HP iPAQ is dialing. After a short period of time, it displays the network is verifying the username and password. Next, the computer registers on the network and connects. Your HP iPAQ displays a notification indicating an active connection. NOTE:

the notification. The GPRS icon does not change to show when you are connected. If you tap on the icon, the notification displays again, and it allows you to disconnect or re-hide Bluetooth device profiles The functions that Bluetooth supports are called services or profiles. You can communicate only with Bluetooth devices that support at least one of the following profiles:

ActiveSyncUses SPP to connect to ActiveSync on a computer Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) Audio Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) Basic Imaging Profile (BIP) Basic Printer Profile (BPP) File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Generic Access Profile (GAP) Hands Free Profile (HFP) Headset Support Profile (HSP) Human Interface Device Profile (HID) Generic Object Exchange Profile(GOEP) Object Push Protocol (OPP) Personal Area Network (PAN) Serial Port Profile (SPP) Create, end, and accept a Bluetooth partnership You can exchange information between your HP iPAQ and another device that has Bluetooth capabilities. For this, you will have to first create a Bluetooth partnership between the two devices. 66 Chapter 16 Connections NOTE: To exchange information between two Bluetooth enabled devices, make sure Bluetooth is turned on both devices. The devices need not be in the discoverable mode. 1. Make sure the two devices are turned on, discoverable, and within close range. 2. 3. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. Tap Add new device Your HP iPAQ searches for other devices with Bluetooth capabilities and displays them in the list. Tap the name of the other device, and tap Next. In Security, if you want to use a secure, encrypted connection (recommended for enhanced security), check this box, and tap Next. Otherwise, leave the Security field blank and tap Next. Enter the same passkey on the other device. Tap Finish. To give the partnership a more meaningful name, tap and hold the device name under My Shortcuts, then tap Rename. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. Tap and hold the partnership you want to end. Tap Delete. To end a Bluetooth Partnership:

1. 2. 3. To accept a Bluetooth partnership:

1. Make sure your device is turned on, discoverable, and within close range. 2. When prompted to accept a partnership with the device that is requesting the relationship, tap Yes. 3. If a passkey is requested, enter an alphanumeric passkey between 1 and 16 characters in Passkey box and tap Next. Enter the same passkey in the device requesting the partnership. Using a passkey provides greater security. To give the partnership a more meaningful name, change the name of the device in Name box. Tap Finish. 4. 5. If you cannot discover another device, try the following:

Make sure Bluetooth is turned on. Move closer to the device. Make sure the device you are attempting to connect to is on and allows access of being discovered by other devices. Rename a Bluetooth partnership 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. Tap Current profile. Select the partnership you want to rename, and tap Rename. In Enter the name of the new profile box, enter a new name for the partnership. Tap ok. Bluetooth 67 Pair and unpair devices You can pair devices such that they exchange a computer generated security key prior to each connection. The security key is generated from a unique Bluetooth device address, a random number, and a user-defined password. After two devices are paired, they have a trusted relationship with each other. You do not need to give any additional input. Without giving constant authorization, your connections and activities can then be performed between the paired devices. To pair devices:

1.

(Bluetooth) icon to turn Bluetooth on. Tap the 2.

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. Tap the Tap Bluetooth > Bluetooth Connections > Menu > Paired devices. Tap Add, and then tap Lookup. Tap a device name. Enter a password in the Passkey field. Tap ok. Enter the same password into the other device. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. NOTE: Some devices, such as mobile phones, need to be placed in a mode to accept a bond from another device. Refer to that devices user instructions for more information. If you can see other devices, but you cannot connect or exchange data with them, try the following:

Make sure the other device has not restricted your access. Try initiating pairing from the other device. Some Bluetooth devices can only initiate pairing and cannot respond to pairing requests from other devices. If other devices cannot find or connect to your HP iPAQ, try the following:

Make sure Bluetooth is turned on. Make sure you have not restricted other devices from finding your HP iPAQ. Refer to Requiring a Passkey or Bond for more information. Check your Bluetooth settings to make sure you have allowed your device to be discovered by others to connect. To remove a paired relationship between devices:

1. Tap the

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. 2. Make sure that Bluetooth is already on. If not, turn on Bluetooth. 3. 4. 5. 6. Tap Bluetooth > Bluetooth Connections > Menu > Paired devices. Tap a device name. Tap Remove. Tap Yes to remove the pairing. 68 Chapter 16 Connections Make a device discoverable Tap Start > Settings > Connections. Tap Bluetooth > Mode. Select the Make the device visible to other devices check box. When your HP iPAQ is discoverable, other devices with Bluetooth capabilities can detect, your HP iPAQ and attempt to beam information to it, establish a partnership, or use a Bluetooth service. 1. 2. 3. NOTE:

other devices check box. Open Bluetooth settings If you no longer want your HP iPAQ to be discoverable, clear the Make the device visible to 1. 2. 3. Tap the

(Bluetooth) icon to turn Bluetooth on.

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. Tap the Tap Bluetooth > Bluetooth Settings. Authorization to access services If you choose to require authorization to access services, you have to authorize each connection. Your HP iPAQ always asks you if the connection should be permitted. 1.

(Bluetooth) icon to turn Bluetooth on. Tap the 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. Tap the Tap Bluetooth > Bluetooth Settings > Services. Tap the service you want to enable: File Transfer, Information Exchange, Serial Port, Personal Network Server, Hands Free, or Dialup Networking Server. Select Authorization required. Tap ok. Use a passkey or bond To establish a secure connection with another device, you can use the passkey feature or an established bond. You can also add data encryption to this type of security. A passkey is a code you enter to authenticate connections requested by other devices. The passkey must be known and used by both parties or the connection will not be allowed. 1.

(Bluetooth) icon to turn Bluetooth on. Tap the 2. 3. 4. 5.

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. Tap the Tap Bluetooth > Bluetooth Settings > Services. Tap the service you want to enable: File Transfer, Information Exchange, Serial Port, Personal Network Server, Hands free, or Dialup Networking Server. Select Authorization required and Authentication (Passkey) required if you want more security. Bluetooth 69 6. 7. Select Encryption Required if you want all data exchanged between the devices to be encrypted. Tap ok. Set a Bluetooth shared folder You can determine the folder that other devices access when they connect to your HP iPAQ. 1.

(Bluetooth) icon to turn Bluetooth on. Tap the 2.

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. Tap the Tap Bluetooth > Bluetooth Settings > Services. 3. 4. Under Bluetooth Services, tap File Transfer. 5. Under Service Settings, select your preferred settings. 6. 7. 8. Tap Advanced. Tap the Folder icon and locate a required file folder. Tap ok. Set up an incoming or outgoing Bluetooth COM port 1. Make sure your HP iPAQ is connected to the other device via Bluetooth. 2. 3. 4. Tap Start > Settings > Connections. Tap Bluetooth > COM Ports. Tap New Incoming Port or New Outgoing Port. NOTE: New Outgoing Port is only available if at least one Bluetooth device supports serial

(COM) connection. Select a numbered COM port from the list. NOTE:

If the port cannot be created, it is in use. Select a different numbered port. To limit communication on this COM port to only devices with which the HP iPAQ has a Bluetooth partnership, select the Secure Connection check box. Tap Finish. 5. 6. 7. GPRS/EDGE GPRS/EDGE GPRS/EDGE technology provides a connection to the Mobile Phone Network that can be used for Web browsing, MMS messaging, or accessing your corporate network. NOTE: EDGE is an enhancement to GPRS technology and enables higher speed data connections than GPRS. This means faster phone multimedia capabilities such as sending and receiving SMS/MMS messages, and sharing video clips. Check with your service provider to see if they support EDGE technology. If your service provider does not support the EDGE network, the HP iPAQ defaults to GPRS. 70 Chapter 16 Connections Change GPRS network settings The first time you use your SIM Card, the GSM/GPRS Manager automatically detects the phone network and operator and sets up the GPRS connection information for you. You can change these settings to your own preference or create your own network settings. 1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Phone Data Manager. If your operator name displays in the drop-down list, it is recommended that you use that connection and, if needed, edit the default settings. Edit network parameters CAUTION: Editing Network Parameters is not recommended unless you are being assisted by your mobile phone service provider. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Phone Data Manager > Edit network parameters Tapping Edit network parameters gives you access to the following areas:

Internet Connection Information Walks you through the different settings for GPRS and Circuit Switched Data (CSD) connections. MMS Multimedia Messages Allows you to modify the MMS address. WAP Information Allows you to modify the IP Address and Port for the Wireless Access Point

(WAP) Gateway. Edit an Internet connection 1. 2. 3. 4. Tap Internet Connection Information. Tap the connection you want to edit, and then tap Next. Enter a name for the connection such as the carrier name, and then tap Next. Enter the following information and tap Next:

APN Access Point Name of the server to which you are attempting to connect. Name Log on for your connection. Password Password for your connection. Tap Next. 5. 6. On the next screen, choose one of the following and tap Next:

Dynamic Internet Protocol (IP) address Static IP address 7. On the next screen, choose one of the following and tap Next. Dynamic DNS addresses Static DNS addresses Tap Finished. 8. GPRS/EDGE 71 Edit MMS multimedia messages settings Tap MMS Multimedia Messages. 1. 2. Under Enter the MMS Center Address, enter the URL where all MMS messages are sent for delivery by your mobile phone service network. Enter the following information:

APN Access Point Name of the MMS server being connected. Name Log on name for the MMS server. Password Password for the MMS server. Tap Next. Enter the IP address and the Port number for the WAP MMS Gateway and tap Finished. 3. 4. 5. Edit WAP information settings Tap WAP Information. Enter the IP address and the Port information for the WAP Gateway. Tap Next. Enter the IP address and the Port information for the secure WAP Gateway. Tap Finished. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Troubleshoot automatic detection If the automatic network detection fails, you can manually relaunch the application by tapping Start >

Settings > Connections > Phone Data Manager > Automatic detection If the automatic detection setting fails, complete one or more of the following items:

Check to see if the SIM card is present in the HP iPAQ. If it is not present, insert the SIM card and relaunch the application. Ensure that the metal contacts on your SIM card and your SIM slot are not covered with a residue or dust that would inhibit a connection. Select the appropriate country and operator name, and then tap ok. The settings automatically update. If your operator name does not appear in the drop-down list, you must manually add it to the list by tapping the down arrow in the Operator box and tapping Create New. Advanced settings Connect to intranet URLs To connect to intranet sites that have periods in their URLs (for example, intranet.companyname.com), add them to the Work URL Exceptions list. 1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections > Advanced > Exceptions Tap Add new URL In Work URL, enter the intranet URL. 72 Chapter 16 Connections NOTE:

individually by entering *.companyname.com. If you use many URLs that share the same root company name, you can avoid entering them Change an intranet URL Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections > Advanced > Exceptions. Tap the intranet URL exception you want to change, then make the required changes. 1. 2. NOTE: To delete a work URL exception, tap and hold it in the list, then tap Delete. Set up an automatic choice for connections If you have already created more than one connection, you can set up your HP iPAQ to connect to the best available connection automatically. 1. 2. Under My ISP or My Work Network, tap Add a new modem connection to create a new Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections > Tasks. connection. After you create a new connection, under My ISP or My Work Network, tap Manage existing connections. Tap Auto pick. 3. 4. Set up proxy server settings If you are connected to your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or private network during synchronization, your device should download proper proxy settings during synchronization from your computer. If these settings are not on your computer or need to be changed, you can change them manually. Before you begin, obtain the following information from your ISP or network administrator:

User name Password Proxy Server name Port Type of Socks protocol used To set up proxy server settings:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections > Tasks. If a proxy server has not been set up, tap Set up my proxy server, else tap Edit my proxy server. Select the This network connects to the Internet and This network uses a proxy server to connect to the Internet check boxes. In the Proxy server box, enter the proxy server name. To change such settings as port number or proxy server type, tap Advanced and change the required settings. Set up a WAP gateway 4. 5. To access Wireless Access Point (WAP) sites through Internet Explorer, configure your device to use a WAP gateway. Advanced settings 73 3. 4. 5. 6. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Before you begin, obtain the following information from your ISP or network administrator:

User name Password ISP server phone number WAP gateway server name 1. Port number Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections > Advanced > Select Networks > Edit If a proxy server has not been set up, tap New 2. On the Proxy Settings tab, select the This network connects to the Internet and This network uses a proxy server to connect to the Internet check boxes. If necessary, in the Proxy server box, enter the proxy server name. Tap Advanced > WAP. In the Server box, enter the WAP gateway server name. Under Port, enter the port number. The most common WAP port number is 9201. Enter any logon credentials required by the WAP gateway server. Configure advanced proxy settings 1. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections > Advanced > Select Networks > Edit If a proxy server has not been set up, tap New 2. On the Proxy Settings tab, select the This network connects to the Internet and This network uses a proxy server to connect to the Internet check boxes. If necessary, in the Proxy server box, enter the proxy server name. For the appropriate server type, enter the proxy server name and port. If necessary, enter the credentials for connecting with your proxy server. Tap Advanced > Socks. Select Socks 4 or Socks 5. If using Socks 5, enter the credentials for connecting with your proxy server. Advanced connection settings 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Tap the

(iPAQ Wireless) icon.

(WLAN) icon to turn on WLAN. Tap the To connect to a network, tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections > Advanced >

Select Networks. Select My ISP to connect to the Internet through an ISP or select My Work Network to connect to a company network. Select My Work Network if the network requires a proxy server. If you need to change or create a new network management name, tap Edit or New, and then tap ok. From the Connections screen, tap Advanced to set up your Dialing Rules and Exceptions and tap ok. 74 Chapter 16 Connections Set up a VPN server connection A VPN connection helps you to securely connect to servers, such as a corporate network, via the Internet. Before you begin, obtain the following information from your network administrator:

User name Password Domain name TCP/IP settings Host name or IP address of the VPN server To set up a VPN server connection:

1. 2. Under My Work Network, tap Add a new VPN server connection and follow the instructions in Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections > Tasks. the New Connection wizard. 3. Under most circumstances, you should not change any advanced settings. However, you need to change advanced settings when:

The server to which you are connecting does not use dynamically-assigned addresses, and you need to enter your TCP/IP settings. You need to change server DNS or WINS settings. If either of these circumstances applies, from the My VPN screen, tap Advanced and fill in the appropriate information. Tap ok to save the changes and return to the My VPN screen. To view additional information for any screen in the wizard or while changing settings, tap Help. 4. Change a connection group name Your device is already set up with two groups of connection settings: My ISP and My Work Network. You can also change the name of these groups. For example, if you put all of your corporate settings under My Work Network Connections, you can change the name to your companys name. 1. 2. Under My ISP or My Work Network, tap Add a new modem connection to create a new Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections. connection. After you create a new connection, under My ISP or My Work Network, tap Manage existing connections. Tap General. Enter a name for the settings group and tap ok. 3. 4. 5. End a connection It can be useful to end a connection when you are done using it. This frees resources on your HP iPAQ and can save connection charges. When connected via a modem or VPN, tap Connections > Disconnect. When connected via cable, detach your HP iPAQ from the cable. Advanced settings 75 When connected via Bluetooth, tap Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth > Bluetooth Manager > Active Connection. Tap and hold the connection name, and then tap Disconnect. When connected via a network (Ethernet) card, remove the card from your HP iPAQ. Configure VoIP You can make voice calls using Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) and SIP- enabled Internet Protocol Private Branch Exchange (IP PBX) in addition to normal GSM calls. VoIP routes voice conversations using an IP based network. VoIP to VoIP phone calls to any provider are typically free. NOTE: You need to configure the Wi-Fi settings before you can use VoIP. To make calls using VoIP:

1. On the Today screen, tap Internet Calling, which is off by default. 2. On the Internet tab, change the setting from Never to any other available option in the Internet Calling list and tap ok. 3. On the Today screen, the Internet Calling status changes to Not Available. NOTE: Not Available status indicates that VoIP is turned on but not configured. 4. Configure your VoIP using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant. 5. Once the device is registered with the IP-PBX, the Internet Calling status changes to Available or Selected. NOTE: Available indicates that the phone has Wi-Fi access and is registered with the IP-PBX, but the next outgoing call will be over cellular. Selected indicates that the phone has Wi-Fi access, is registered with the IP-PBX, and that VoIP will be used for the next outgoing call. 6. Use the keypad to enter the number you want to dial and press the NOTE: On the Today screen, if the status of Internet Calling is No Service, it indicates that your HP iPAQ did not register successfully with the IP PBX server. To configure VoIP using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant:

1. Download and install the HP iPAQ Setup Assistant from the Getting Started CD before you begin

(Answer/Send) key. the configuration. 2. Open HP iPAQ Setup Assistant and click Manage Configuration > New. 3. Click VoIP to configure the settings 4. Enter the username and password for your SIP/VoIP account. Enter the Domain name and the Service Provider, if available. Enter the SIP Server name or IP address as provided by your network administrator in SIP Proxy box. NOTE: Select Register With SIP Proxy check box if you want to use SIP Proxy as your SIP registrar. After you enter the SIP Proxy, you do not have to enter the SIP Registrar again. Enter the Voice mail Number (optional) which is provided with your account. 5. 6. 76 Chapter 16 Connections 17 GPS navigation Google Maps Google Maps is a free web mapping service application and technology provided by Google that powers many map-based services. This includes the Google Maps website, Google Ride Finder, and embedded maps on third-party websites. It offers street maps, a route planner, and an urban business locator for numerous countries around the world. Install Google Maps To install Google Maps using synchronizing software:

1. Download the required version from http://amp.google.com/static/mptwd/glm/windows/. 2. Connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using the synchronizing software. 3. Copy the file on your HP iPAQ. 4. Using the File Explorer on your device, locate the CAB and install it. To install Google Maps using device browser:

1. Download the required version from http://amp.google.com/static/mptwd/glm/windows/. 2. Tap Install after downloading the file. Launch and navigate Google Maps Tap Start > Programs > Google Maps. In the Terms and Conditions screen, tap Accept. In the About screen, tap ok. To launch Google Maps:

1. 2. 3. To navigate Google Maps:

1. 2. 3. 4. Tap Start > Programs > Google Maps. Tap Menu > Directions Enter your current location in the From Location box and destination in the To Location box. Tap ok to start the search. Uninstall Google Maps To uninstall Google Maps:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Settings > System > Remove Programs. Select Google Maps and tap Remove. Tap Done button. Google Maps 77 18 Applications Enjoy with your HP iPAQ by listening to your favorite MP3 music using Windows Media Player. You can also record voice clips to be sent as an attachment to family and friends. Use MS Office applications to view presentations, spreadsheets, and documents. HP applications HP Help and Support The HP Help and Support application increases visibility, accessibility, and usability of the existing help, support. To access HP Help and Support:

1. 2. Tap Start > Programs > HP Help and Support. To view additional information, tap the appropriate HTML links. Serial and Model Numbers displays the products serial number, model ID, product ID, and IMEI number. HP iPAQ Quick Tips launches the HP iPAQ Tips application. Help Topics launches the Help Topics screen. Customer Support launches the Customer Support application. System Details launches the HP Asset Viewer application. NOTE: Tap About to view the application name, version number, and copyright information. HP Voice Reply HP Voice Reply allows you to reply to your e-mail messages using your own voice. You can use HP Voice Reply to reply to your e-mail messages or compose new e-mail. You can use this feature while either replying to all, replying to the sender, or forwarding a message. Use HP Voice Reply with your Outlook account as well as the POP3 and IMAP4 accounts from your HP iPAQ. You can access HP Voice Reply in three different views:

List View While reviewing a list of messages in the Inbox. Read View While reading a particular message from the list of messages in the Inbox. Compose View While composing a new e-mail message, replying to an e-mail message, or forwarding an e-mail message. 78 Chapter 18 Applications To use HP Voice Reply:

1. When composing a new e-mail message or replying or forwarding a message, tap Menu >

HP Voice Reply to select either of the following options:

Reply to Sender To send your reply only to the recipient who initially sent you the e-mail message. Reply to All To send your reply to all the recipients of the initial e-mail message. Forward To forward the initial e-mail message with your reply to any recipient. NOTE: The three submenu options: Reply to Sender, Reply to All, and Forward are available under the List and Read views. 2. Next, in the recording window, tap the 3.

(Record) button to record your message.

(Stop) button when you finish recording your message. You can do one of the following Tap the after you finish recording:

The recorded message is automatically attached to your e-mail. Enter any short text message if required. You can also make changes to the editable fields in the e-mail. Tap Send to send the message to the recipient. 4. 5. 6. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant Use HP iPAQ Setup Assistant to simplify configuring settings on your HP iPAQ. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant lets you save the settings on your computer. This can help you restore configuration settings on your HP iPAQ at any time. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant also allows you to perform a factory reset on your HP iPAQ and view detailed product information. Using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant, you can manage multiple configurations and apply them quickly to your HP iPAQ. You can create a new configuration, modify existing settings, delete a selected configuration, or apply selected settings to your HP iPAQ. Select the following tabs to configure your settings:

Owner Information Enter your identification information and notes to describe you and your HP iPAQ. This is helpful if you lose your HP iPAQ. Wireless Network Wireless network settings describe the configuration needed to connect to your work, home, or other wireless network. Proxy Proxy servers are located between two networks and are used to help prevent an attacker from invading a private network. You can enter proxy settings to specify the proxy configuration for your network. E-mail E-mail settings describe the configuration required to connect to and check your Internet e-mail accounts. Exchange Server Exchange Server is used to access e-mail, calendars, contacts, tasks, and other mailbox contents while on the go. You can set up Outlook on your HP iPAQ to synchronize directly with your organization's Exchange Server. VoIP VoIP routes voice conversations using an IP-based network. VoIP to VoIP phone calls to any provider are typically free. SIP Proxy servers are used to implement call-routing policies and provide features to users. HP applications 79 Speed Dial HP iPAQ Setup Assistant helps you to create and manage a list of speed dial numbers for your HP iPAQ. NOTE: The first speed dial entry is usually reserved for Voice mail by your phone service provider, and your service provider might also reserve an entry for emergency response. Browser Favorite Use your HP iPAQ Setup Assistant to create and manage a list of your favorite URLs. You can access these URLs using the Internet Explorer on your HP iPAQ. Finish In case of a new configuration, after you click Finish, enter a configuration name and an optional password, and then click OK in the save configuration. If this is an existing configuration, the existing name and password will be used. HP iPAQ Shortcuts Use HP iPAQ Shortcuts Use HP iPAQ Shortcuts to access a list of shortcuts to your favorite applications or features on your HP iPAQ. To use HP Shortcuts:

1. 2. NOTE: You can also access the HP iPAQ Shortcuts from the Today screen by pressing the left softkey. Tap Start > Programs > HP Shortcuts. Scroll and tap to select the application you want to use. Edit HP iPAQ Shortcuts You can edit the default shortcuts list or create new shortcuts and store them in the existing list. To edit a shortcut:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Scroll to the shortcut you want to edit in HP iPAQ Shortcuts list and tap Menu > Edit. To change the default shortcuts to different applications, tap Select new target. Select Tasks, Programs, Web Links, or File and tap Select. Select an application for which you want to create a shortcut. The selected application is shown in the Shortcut Name box. Tap Save to save the application shortcut in the shortcut list. NOTE: To modify the name, specify a new name in the Shortcut name box and press Save to save the modified name. HP iPAQ DataConnect The first time you use your SIM Card, the HP iPAQ DataConnect application automatically detects the phone network and operator and, configures the GPRS/EDGE settings. You can also launch the application and manually select the operator. 80 Chapter 18 Applications To configure the data settings:

1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > HP iPAQ DataConnect. Select a country and operator, and then tap Select to configure the network settings for the selected operator. The data settings will be retrieved each time you try to connect to the Internet using GPRS. It is not recommended to manually configure using HP iPAQ DataConnect. 3. WARNING!

HP Asset Viewer Using the HP Asset Viewer application, you can view information about the system, integrated modules, and attached accessories. To access HP Asset Viewer:

1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > System > HP Asset Viewer. To view additional system information, tap the appropriate tabs. The Identify tab displays the serial number and the user information. The Memory tab displays the iPAQ device memory information. The Version tab displays the iPAQ device Version information The Display tab displays the iPAQ device display panel information. The System tab displays the iPAQ device system information. The Camera tab displays the iPAQ device Camera information. The Bluetooth tab displays the iPAQ device Bluetooth information. The WLAN tab displays the iPAQ device WLAN information. The GSM tab displays the iPAQ device GSM information. The GPS tab displays the iPAQ device GPS information. Certificate Enroller Certificate Enroller is an enhanced security feature for retrieving and registering new certificates. This application-initiated enrollment allows you to request a user certificate from a certificate server. NOTE: Certificate Enroller picks up certificate types from Active Directory as well as from the device data store. You must enter a server name for retrieving the certificate, and if required, a valid username and password. To access Certificate Enroller:

1. 2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter server name, user name, and password. Tap ok to save the Tap Start > Settings > System > HP CertEnroller. settings. NOTE: Tap Retrieve to initiate the transaction of downloading the certificate from the server. 3. Once the certificate is retrieved, tap Menu > Cancel to exit. NOTE: Tap Menu > About to view a brief description of the application, application name, version number, and copyright statement. HP applications 81 Manage certificates 1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > System > Certificates. Select a certificate tab. The Personal tab displays your personal certificates. The Intermediate tab displays the intermediate certification authorities. The Root tab displays the root certification authorities. NOTE: To view the certificate details, tap the required certificate on each tab. HP iPAQ Tips Use HP iPAQ Tips to perform operations on your HP iPAQ in a quick and efficient manner. A tip is displayed on your screen every time you turn on your HP iPAQ. Tap Menu > Next to display the next tip. To quit the application, tap Dismiss. You can also access HP iPAQ Tips by tapping Start >

Programs > HP Help and Support > HP iPAQ Quick Tips. TIP: You can also access the HP iPAQ Tips application by tapping Start > Programs > HP iPAQ Tips. HP Voice Commander Use HP Voice Commander application to look up contacts, dial a contact by name, get calendar information, play and control your music, as well as launch applications on your HP iPAQ. For more information refer Voice commands on page 24. TIP: You can also access the HP Voice Commander application by tapping Start > Programs. HP iPAQ Mobile Broadband Connect Use HP iPAQ Mobile Broadband Connect to connect your computer to the Internet using your GPRS enabled iPAQ. You need to install the HP iPAQ Mobile Broadband Connect application, which is available on the Getting Started CD. NOTE: Make sure you have installed ActiveSync 4.5 for Windows XP OS or WMDC 6.1 for Windows Vista OS on your computer before using this application. To connect your computer to the Internet using your HP iPAQ:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to your computer using the mini-USB synchronization cable. 2. The HP iPAQ Mobile Broadband Connect icon in the system tray on your computer indicating that the iPAQ has established a connection with the computer. 3. Double click on the HP iPAQ Mobile Broadband Connect icon in the system tray on your computer. Select a valid GPRS connection from the connection list on your HP iPAQ and tap Next to move to DataModem state. You can then access the Internet using the Internet browser on your computer. 4. 5. 82 Chapter 18 Applications HP Enterprise Mobility Agent (mProveDM) Use the HP Enterprise Mobility Agent to help you easily configure and manage your HP iPAQ. Visit http://redirect.hp.com/svs/rdr to download and install the HP Enterprise Mobility Agent. After you install the install different applications from the Internet on your HP iPAQ. This application requires WLAN connection with access to internet. HP Enterprise Mobility Agent, the application will configure, download, and HP iPAQ File Store You can install programs and save files to the iPAQ File Store folder, which can be accessed from the File Explorer on your HP iPAQ. Programs and files stored on your iPAQ File Store folder are not deleted even if you perform a full reset on your HP iPAQ. 1. Copy the files to be saved to the iPAQ File Store folder. 2. 3. Tap Start > Programs > File Explorer > iPAQ File Store. Tap Edit > Paste. CAUTION:

save new files or modify existing files in the hp folder. iPAQ File Store may contain a special folder called hp to store system files. Do not NOTE: Before saving files to the iPAQ File Store folder, it is a good idea to determine how much memory is available in the folder. To view the amount of memory, tap Start > Settings > System >

Memory > Storage Card, and then select iPAQ File Store from the list. HP PrintSmart Mobile Use HP PrintSmart Mobile to print information from your HP iPAQ mobile device to a compatible printer while away from the office and whenever you need it. HP PrintSmart Mobile application provides printing support over Bluetooth, IR, and Wi-Fi network. It also provides printing support for various document formats including .doc, .xls, .jpg, .bmp, and .html. You can also configure various printers and manage print jobs. For more information, refer the Getting Started CD. HP Keyguard The HP Keyguard application deactivates your iPAQ touch screen and keys to prevent accidental activation of the device or any of its functions. To enable the HP Keyguard application, tap Start > Settings > Buttons > Lock > Enable Keyguard >

ok. NOTE: Once the device enters standby mode, the keyguard is automatically activated. To disable the HP Keyguard application, clear the Enable Keyguard check box and tap ok. The buttons on the device do not perform their functions and the touch screen is inactive until you complete the sequence to unlock the keys. To unlock this application, follow the deactivation sequence as described on the screen. NOTE: When you receive a call, the keyguard remains active and allows you to answer the call. HP applications 83 NOTE: To dial an emergency number when the keyguard is active, enter the emergency number using the keypad and press the

(Answer/Send) key. HP SecureConnect Mobile Use HP SecureConnect Mobile to automatically connect your HP iPAQ to Wi-Fi hotspots or home and office networks. You need to follow an online registration process to begin using this application. All communications carried out using HP SecureConnect Mobile supports Cisco Compatible Extensions v1, v2, v3, and v4 (CCX) and thus gives enhanced security, mobility, quality of service, and network management. HP iPAQ Ring Tone Manager With HP iPAQ Ring Tone Manager application, you can add and remove ring tones on your HP iPAQ. To add a ring tone:

1. 2. On the iPAQ Ring Tones screen, under Select Ring Tones to add to your device, all *.wav, Tap Start > Settings > System > RingTones > Add.

*.mid, and *.mp3 files stored on the device are displayed. Select the required ring tones, and tap Add. 3.

(Play) button. Use the To play the newly added ring tones, tap the tone being played. To add a ring tone:

1. 2. On the iPAQ Ring Tones screen, under Select Ring Tones to be removed from your device Tap Start > Settings > System > RingTones > Remove.

(Stop) button, to stop the ring list, select the required ring tones,. Tap Remove. 3. NOTE: You can use the HP iPAQ Ring Tone Manager application only to add and remove ring tones. This application lacks the ability to assign any file as a current ring tone. HP iPAQ Audio Applet Tap Start > Settings > System > Audio Control > Equalizer. Select the Enable Headphone Equalizer check box to enable the equalizer controls. From the Mode list, select the required mode. The HP iPAQ Audio Applet allows you to set, adjust, and save settings for the equalizer bands. Saving the equalizer settings helps in their easy retrieval. Additionally, you can define a new mode with the desired equalizer band values. To adjust the Headphone Equalizer settings:

1. 2. 3. NOTE: The equalizer settings are preset and unalterable for the predefined modes: Flat, Classical, Rock, Jazz, Dance, and Vocal. To create a new mode:

1. 2. Tap New on the Headphone Equalizer screen. In the Mode Name box, enter a desired name for the new mode and tap OK. 84 Chapter 18 Applications NOTE: The new mode name should be different from the predefined mode names. You can modify and delete the new modes. To access the Microphone settings:

1. 2. On the Microphone screen, deselect the Enable AGC check box to activate the microphone Tap Start > Settings > System > Audio Control > Mic. settings. NOTE:

3. Select one of the predefined modes: Quiet, Normal, or Noisy. 4. Use the slider to adjust the set value of each of these modes. If you enable the Automatic Gain Control (AGC), the system handles the gain level. Pocket Internet Explorer (PIE) You can launch the PIE application from the Start menu. This application displays an iPAQ-customized home page with the following icons:

iPAQ software iPAQ Mobile Windows Mobile iPAQ accessories HP shopping Each icon is linked to its respective Web page. Therefore, the appropriate Web page opens up when you tap a desired icon. Remote Desktop Mobile Use the Remote Desktop Mobile to log on to a Windows Terminal Server. This facility allows you to use all programs installed on this server. To connect to a Terminal Server:

1. 2. 3. 4. Tap Options > Display to set the color options, 256 Colors or High Color (16 bit). You can view the Remote desktop display either in the full screen mode or you can choose to fit the remote desktop to your iPAQ screen. Tap Start > Programs > Remote Desktop Mobile. In the Computer box, enter a Terminal Server name or TCP/IP address. Enter your user name, password, and domain in the respective boxes. Tap Connect. Remote Desktop Mobile 85 Tap Options > Sound to set the Remote desktop sound. You can either select to mute the sound, play the sound on the remote computer, or play the sound on your device. Windows Media Player Use Windows Media Player to enjoy your digital media in new ways both at home and on the go. Using Windows Media Player, you can play media audio and video files, and MP3 audio files stored on your phone or memory card. For a complete list of features and more, visit http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmedia. NOTE: Protected files are digital media files that are secured with a license to prevent unauthorized use or playback. Licenses are created and managed by using the DRM technology. Clear the Now Playing List Tap Start > Programs > Windows Media and select Now Playing. The Now Playing playlist displays the currently playing file and any files that are queued up to play next. You can quickly remove all items from the playlist by clearing the Now Playing playlist. 1. If you are on the Library screen, select the Now Playing category to display the Now Playing screen. If you are on the Playback screen, select Now Playing to display the Now Playing screen. 2. On the Now Playing screen, tap Menu > Clear Now Playing. Update a Library In most cases, Windows Media Player Mobile automatically updates your libraries. However, you can manually update a library to ensure that it has links to any new files that you might have recently copied to your HP iPAQ or a removable storage card. 1. 2. On the Library screen, tap Menu > Update Library 3. Wait for the files to be added, and then tap Done. If you are not already on the Library screen, tap Menu > Library Use HP Voice Commander to play media files You can play your media files by using the HP Voice Commander application on your HP iPAQ. 1. 2. Hold your HP iPAQ 10 cm away from your face and say Play Music (Media File Name) to play Press the HP Voice Commander key on your HP iPAQ. the media file. NOTE: The Play Music voice command will only play media files present in a playlist. NOTE: Press the HP Voice Commander key and say Pause Resume Music to pause or resume the media file. MS Office applications Word Mobile You can create and edit documents and templates in Word Mobile. You can also save the documents and templates as .doc, .rtf, .txt, and .dot files. 86 Chapter 18 Applications With Word Mobile, you can:

Edit word documents and templates created on your computer. Open and edit Pocket Word (*.psw) documents NOTE:

If you edit a file, you will need to save it in .doc, .rtf, .txt, or .dot format. To access Word Mobile, tap Start > Office Mobile > Word Mobile. Options available when you tap Menu allow you to:

Create a new document or edit an existing document. Format a document. Check spellings and count words in a document. Save, move, rename, or delete a document. Send a document via e-mail or Bluetooth. Excel Mobile You can create and edit workbooks and templates on your HP iPAQ with Excel Mobile. With Excel Mobile, you can:

View, edit, and create charts and graphics, which can be embedded as objects in a worksheet or placed on a separate worksheet. Enter formulas and functions, and then filter data to see the subset of information you want. Split panes to view different parts of a worksheet at the same time. Freeze the top and left-most panes in a worksheet to keep row and column labels or other data visible as you scroll through a sheet. To access Excel Mobile, tap Start > Office Mobile > Excel Mobile. To access options for organizing and formatting a worksheet, open a worksheet and tap Menu. In addition to Cut, Copy, and Paste, there are options in Menu that allow you to:

Paste cells using Paste Special Clear cell contents and formats applied to cells. Insert new cells, charts, symbols, functions, and define names in a workbook. Set dimensions for rows and columns. Align cells, set font and style for the text, and set cell borders. Create new worksheets and save, rename, or delete existing worksheets. Send a worksheet via e-mail or Bluetooth. PowerPoint Mobile Use PowerPoint Mobile to open and view slide show presentations created on your computer. With PowerPoint Mobile, you can:

Open a presentation from an e-mail message. Download a presentation from a file share or the Internet. Copy a presentation to your HP iPAQ via a storage card. MS Office applications 87 NOTE: Slide shows created in *.ppt or *.pps format with PowerPoint 97 and later can be viewed on your device. PowerPoint features that are not supported on your HP iPAQ include:

Notes: Notes written for slides are not visible. Rearranging or editing slides: PowerPoint Mobile is a viewer only. To access PowerPoint Mobile, tap Start > Office Mobile > PowerPoint Mobile. Options available when you tap Menu allow you to:

Set up a slide show. Rename, move, delete, or create a copy of a presentation. Send a presentation via e-mail or Bluetooth. Games Bubble Breaker The objective of Bubble Breaker is to have balls (more than one) of the same color deleted from the screen. The fewer balls you leave behind, the higher your score will be. To start a new game:

1. 2. 3. 4. NOTE: To recall the balls you deleted, tap Menu > Undo Move. Tap Start > Programs > Games > Bubble Breaker. Tap New Game to start a new game. Tap Menu > Statistics to select a style to display relative entries. Tap Menu > Options to edit the settings for the game. To play a game:

1. 2. 3. 4. Solitaire Tap Start > Programs > Games > Bubble Breaker. Tap New Game to start a new game. Scroll and select a ball which is of the same color as the other balls around. Tap the selected balls twice to delete the balls from the screen. The objective of Solitaire is to use all the cards in the deck to build up four suit stacks in ascending order, beginning with the aces. You win the game when all cards are on the suit stacks. To play a game:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Programs > Games > Solitaire. Tap Menu > New Game to start a new game. Tap and hold the card you want to move and drag it to the card stack to which you want to move the card. 4. Move any aces on the seven stacks to the four card spaces at the top of the screen, and then make any other available plays. 88 Chapter 18 Applications 5. Tap a card twice to move it to the four card stack on the upright corner of the screen if it belongs there. The card that is faced up on the four card stacks is always available for play. 6. When you have made all the available plays, tap Draw to turn over cards. Internet Sharing You can use your HP iPAQ as a wireless modem. The Internet Sharing software on your HP iPAQ guides you during the connection process. Insert a GPRSenabled SIM into your HP iPAQ before setting up Internet Sharing. You might also need to install the software drivers (located on the Getting Started CD) on to your laptop. Before you can begin Internet Sharing, make sure you have a cellular connection. If you do not have an active connection, you will not be able to launch the Internet Sharing application. To connect to a laptop using a USB data connection You might need to install the USB driver before connecting to your computer. If your computer has automatically added your HP iPAQ as a new modem, you can skip the following steps:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using the mini-USB synchronization cable. Your computer might prompt you for the wireless USB modem driver with a New hardware wizard menu screen. Else proceed to To set up a USB modem connection. 2. Click Next on the welcome screen of the Install Wizard. 3. 4. Select the Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended) option. Select Specify a Location and browse to the C:\ drive folder that contains the USB driver. NOTE: Click Next to allow your computer to automatically search and download the USB driver file. 5. Click Finish. 6. After installing the driver, Smartphone USB Modem will be added to the device list in the Device Manager. 7. Next, disconnect your HP iPAQ from the computer. NOTE: 56 K modems are capable of receiving 56 Kbps from a compatible service provider. Actual speeds will vary depending on line conditions. Setting Up a USB modem connection:

1. Make sure that your HP iPAQ is not connected to your computer. 2. 3. 4. 5. Now connect your HP iPAQ to your computer with the mini-USB synchronization cable and tap Tap Start > Programs > Internet Sharing. Scroll and select USB from the PC Connection list. Scroll and select the type of GPRS connection you want to use from the Network Connection list. Connect. Internet Sharing 89 To connect to a laptop using Bluetooth data connection For best results, connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using a mini-USB to establish a synchronization relationship before connecting via Bluetooth. Follow the instructions on your synchronization software help for configuring Bluetooth on your computer. To set up a Bluetooth modem connection:

1. Make sure that your HP iPAQ is not connected to your computer. 2. 3. 4. 5. Make your HP iPAQ visible and detectable. Connect the Bluetooth PAN to your computer and Tap Start > Programs > Internet Sharing. Scroll and select Bluetooth PAN from the PC Connection list. Scroll and select the type of GPRS connection you want to use from the Network Connection list. create a partnership between them. Press Connect after the partnership is established. 6. Internet Explorer Use Internet Explorer Mobile to view and download Web pages as well as browse Web sites through synchronization, or when connected to the Internet. The HP iPAQ DataConnect application detects the network settings and lets you connect to Internet Web sites. To open a link using favorite page:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Internet Explorer to open the Internet Explorer Mobile. Tap Favorites list and tap to open the required link. Tap Menu > Favorites to list all your favorite sites and tap Menu > Add To Favorites to add a new URL in your favorites list. Tap Menu > History to display the history. 4. NOTE: Tap Menu > Tools > Options to change general, memory, and security settings. NOTE: You can send any URL as an e-mail message by tapping Menu > Tools > Send Link You can learn more about Internet Explorer by tapping Start > Help > Contents > Browse the Web. Windows Live Messenger You can use MSN Messenger on your phone to send instant messages. MSN Messenger provides the same chat environment as of the MSN Messenger on your computer. With the MSN Messenger feature, you can:

Send and receive Instant Messages. Change your own status or view the status of others on your list. Invite others for a chat conversation. Block certain contacts from seeing your status or sending you messages. 90 Chapter 18 Applications To use MSN Messenger, you need a Microsoft.NET Passport account unless you already have a Hotmail account. To set up a Microsoft.NET Passport account, go to http://www.passport.net. After you have an account, you can use your HP iPAQ MSN Messenger feature. Sign in and out of messenger Tap Sign in after navigating to a required sign-in status. Enter your information in the Sign-in and Password box. Tap Sign In. Tap Start > Programs > Messenger to open MSN Messenger feature. To sign into the Messenger:

1. 2. To sign out of the Messenger:

Tap Menu > Sign Out to sign-out of MSN Messenger. If you do not sign out of MSN Messenger, you remain on a data connection, which might result in additional charges from your service provider. The session will not time out or end unless one of the following occurs:

User ends instant messenger session User accepts an incoming voice call An outgoing voice call is placed The device is turned off or moves out of range Send instant messages You can send instant messages from your MSN Messenger to contacts on your messenger list. To send Instant Messages:

1. 2. You can also manage your contacts and control their visibility. To manage contacts in the MSN Messenger:

Select the person to whom you want to send an instant message and tap Send. Enter your message, and tap Send. Tap Menu > Add New Contacts to create a new contact. Tap Menu > Contact Options > Delete to delete an existing contact. Tap Menu > Block/Unblock to block or unblock the selected contact from seeing your status and sending you instant messages. NOTE: Tap Menu > My Text to add common messages when composing instant messages. Tap Menu > Invite to invite a contact to an ongoing chat. You can also see who is already talking to you or change between chats by tapping Menu > Chats. Change your status You can change your status on MSN Messenger according to your need. To change your status:

1. 2. Tap and select your name in the contact list. Press Menu > Change Appearances, and navigate to select the required status. Windows Live Messenger 91 OMA DRM Client Placeholder More information required. Pocket Panel Lite Placeholder More information required. SMS cell broadcast Placeholder More information required. SIM Toolkit Placeholder More information required. Sim Manager Placeholder More information required. iPAQ power Placeholder More information required. iPAQ backlight Placeholder More information required. TTY Placeholder More information required. 92 Chapter 18 Applications 19 Product specifications System specifications NOTE: Not all models described are available in all countries/regions. For more information on specifications for your particular model, on your HP iPAQ, tap Start > Settings > System > HP Asset Viewer. System Feature Processor Operating System Memory External Power Display SD Slot Headphone Jack Antenna Audio Battery Bluetooth WLAN Camera Description Marvell PXA270 (Bulverde) 520 MHz Microsoft Windows Mobile 6 Professional 128 MB/256 MB RAM/ROM Power adapter: input 100240 Vac, 200 mA, 50 to 60 Hz and output +5 Vdc, 1 A USB charger: 5 Vdc, 100/500 mA 2.8 240x320 TFT LCD with touch screen Supports MicroSD memory Placeholder Internal WLAN and Bluetooth antennas Placeholder 1590 mAh Li-Ion removable/rechargeable battery Bluetooth 2.0, Profiles: Handsfree/ OBEX/ PAN/ FTP/ Serial Port/ A2DP, 10 m range (approximately 33 ft) High-speed, low-power, short-range wireless communication with other Bluetooth devices IEEE 802.11b/g 3 M pixels Auto-focus (10 cm to infinity) 4x Digital Zoom Video recording with audio (max. QVGA) Physical specifications Length Width US 4.61 inches 2.37 inches Metric 117 mm 60.3 mm System specifications 93 Depth Weight US 0.68 inches Metric 17.3 mm With battery: 5.149 oz With battery: 146 g Without battery: 4.021 oz Without battery: 114 g Operating environment Temperature Operating Non-operating Relative Humidity Operating Non-operating US 14 to 113 F 4 to 140 F 85 % RH 90 % RH Metric 10 to 45 C 20 to 60 C 85 % RH 90 % RH 94 Chapter 19 Product specifications 20 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo

(United States Only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call 1-800-HP-INVENT (1-800-474-6836) Federal Communications Commission Notice 95 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Canadian Notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union Notice Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with thecorrect CEmarked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. This CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. This CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, D-71034 Bblingen, Germany The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

96 Chapter 20 Regulatory notices Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN Devices France L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions: cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire-2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Battery Warning WARNING! This HP iPAQ contains a lithium ion rechargeable battery. To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. Replace only with the HP spare. WARNING! Fire, Explosion, And Severe Burn Hazard. Do Recharge, Crush, Disassemble, Heat above (100 C/212 F), or Incinerate. CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. Battery Recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, visit http://www.hp.com/recycle. Battery Disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Battery Warning 97 Equipment Warning WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, electrical shock, fire or damage to the equipment:

Plug the AC adapter into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the equipment by unplugging the AC adapter from the AC outlet or unplugging the synchronization cable from the host computer. Do not place anything on the power cord or any of the other cables. Arrange them so that no one may accidentally step on or trip over them. Do not pull on a cord or cable. When unplugging from the electrical outlet, grasp the cord by the plug or, in the case of the AC adapter, grasp the AC adapter and pull out from the electrical outlet. Do not use converter kits sold for appliances to power your HP iPAQ. Acoustics Warning WARNING! Listening to this device at high volume levels and for extended durations may damage ones hearing. In order to reduce the risk of damage to hearing, one should lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level, and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. Headsets or earphones used with this device should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. HP recommends using the headset delivered with your iPAQ (part number 455673-001) that is in compliance with EN 50332-1. 98 Chapter 20 Regulatory notices Class 1 LED Product Airline Travel Notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Medical Electronic Equipment If you have a medical condition that requires you to use a pacemaker, hearing aid, or any type of medical electronic equipment, consult the manufacturer of the equipment to determine if the medical equipment is shielded from RF energy. Turn off your HP iPAQ in health care facilities or hospitals when there are posted restrictions requiring you to do so. SAR Notice THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the international guidelines is 2.0 W/kg*. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the device. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, compliance with the European R&TTE directive must be shown. This directive includes as one essential requirement the protection of the health and the safety for the user and any other person. The highest non-FCC SAR value for this device when tested for use at the ear is 0.791 W/kg (10g). This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation other than the HP belt clip supplied with the product, it should not contain metal.

* The non-FCC SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. Wireless Notices In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, etc. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this device, please ask for authorization to use it prior to turning it on. Class 1 LED Product 99 U.S. Regulatory Wireless Notice WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antenna should be minimized. No metallic body accessories are allowed and 2.5 cm spacing between PDA and the body must be maintained to satisfy RF Exposure. This PDA has been tested and demonstrated compliance when WLAN with Bluetooth,and GSM with Bluetooth are transmitting simultaneously. The highest FCC SAR value for this device when tested for use at the head is 1.47 W/kg and when tested for use at the body is 1.52 W/kg. This PDA must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. SAR compliance for body-worn operations is restricted to the holster <M/N: 459084-001> designated or supplied for this product and to belt-clips, holsters, or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and which provide at least 2.5cm separation between the device and the users body. Canadian Regulatory Wireless Notice Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Brazilian Notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Singaporean Wireless Notice Switch off your cellular telephone when in an aircraft. The use of cellular telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the cellular network, and is illegal. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action or both. Users are advised not to use the equipment when at a refueling point. Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress. The use of the Alert device to operate a vehicles lights or horn on public roads is not permitted. It is advised that a handheld microphone or telephone handset should not be used by the driver while the vehicle is moving, except in an emergency. Speak only into a fixed, neck slung or clipped-on microphone when it would not distract your attention from the road. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, it is recommended that no part of the human body be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. 100 Chapter 20 Regulatory notices Japanese Notice Wireless LAN 802.11b Devices Wireless LAN 802.11g Devices Bluetooth Devices Taiwan DGT Notice Japanese Notice 101 1. SAR ? 1.6W/Kg ;

??GSM:900 1.0 W/Kg PCN:1800 0.497 W/Kg 2. Korean Notice 102 Chapter 20 Regulatory notices 21 Frequently Asked Questions I am having trouble turning on my HP iPAQ. What should I do?

Your HP iPAQ displays to have problems with the battery. Please perform the following checks:

Is the battery charged?

Is the battery properly installed?

Are the contacts on the battery and phone clean? If the contacts appear to be soiled, contact your dealer to get them cleaned. I am unable to make or receive calls. How do I fix this?

If you have problems making or receiving calls, please perform the following checks:

Is the reception of the network signal good?

Is the network set up properly? If necessary, try to select your network manually. Have you activated the Fixed Dialing, Call Forwarding, and Call Barring functions? If yes, deactivate them temporarily. Are you using your HP iPAQ with other SIM cards with the Enable SIM PIN function activated? If yes, deactivate the function temporarily. Is your HP iPAQ switched to the Flight mode? If yes, turn it off. Are you currently located within closed boundaries? If yes, move to an open space or closer to a window. I have trouble connecting to the Internet. What should I do?

If you have trouble connecting to the Internet, please perform the following checks:

Make sure you have subscribed for a data service from your service operator. Make sure you entered correct setting parameters, such as APN and IP addresses in data profile setup. I am unable to hear voices clearly. How do I resolve this?

If you are unable to hear to voices clearly, make sure you have turned off the in-call mute function. I cannot use certain call functions. What should I do?

To use certain advanced call functions, such as Call Forwarding and Call Barring, you may need to subscribe to these services from your service operator. I am having trouble turning on my HP iPAQ. What should I do? 103 Why do I hear disturbing noises during a phone call?

You may hear disturbing noises if you use your HP iPAQ near a microwave oven, speakers, or a television set. Avoid using your HP iPAQ near such items as it has an adverse effect on the voice quality. Why are the standby and talk time shorter at times?

Follow the guidelines given below to improve the standby and talk times on your HP iPAQ. The HP iPAQ may consume more power when the signal reception is poor. Try to move to an open location when you use your HP iPAQ. If you are using a new battery, it may take several charging and discharging cycles for the battery to reach its original capacity. Use the HP iPAQ after charging it completely. If your battery is very old, replace it with a new one. Avoid using the HP iPAQ in very high or low temperature environments. The efficiency of a battery can be effected by extreme temperature conditions. Why does the HP iPAQ operate slowly at times?

You should have at least 1.5 to 2 MB of free memory space on your HP iPAQ so that the device operates efficiently. To check the free memory space, tap Start > Settings > System > Memory. Remember to delete or transfer old e-mail messages and pictures on your HP iPAQ to free available memory space. Why do I see the Today screen layout error message on my HP iPAQ display screen?

You will get a Today screen layout error message if you did not select a Today screen layout. To correct this, tap Start > Settings > System > Screen and select a layout for the Today screen. I have trouble charging my battery. What should I do?

If you have trouble charging your battery, please perform the following checks:

Is the battery charger correctly plugged into the battery charger socket on the HP iPAQ?

Is the power cord of the charger damaged?

Is the battery very old? If yes, replace with a new battery and try again. I am unable to use the ActiveSync feature. What should I do?

To be able to use the ActiveSync feature, upgrade your computer to the latest version of ActiveSync. It is recommended to use ActiveSync 4.5 or a higher version. Visit http://www.microsoft.com/downloads for the latest versions. My HP iPAQ was not connected during WMDC installation?

Although you do not need to connect your HP iPAQ during the installation process of WMDC, it is highly recommended to have it connected. 104 Chapter 21 Frequently Asked Questions Which factors degrade the GPS signal and affect accuracy?

The GPS signal slows down when:

It passes through the atmosphere. It reflects off objects such as tall buildings or large rock surfaces before reaching the receiver. Performance is impacted when the device is used inside vehicles having thermal glass windshields. The thermally shielded glass blocks the GPS signal from reaching the device. You are indoor, underwater, or underground. You are running multiple applications whiile connecting. My HP iPAQ was not connected during WMDC installation?

It is not a strict requirement that you have your HP iPAQ connected during the installation process of WMDC, but it is highly recommend that you do. My HP iPAQ was connected while I was installing but WMDC does not launch even after installation?

In some cases after an upgrade, you will need to disconnect and reconnect the device for WMDC to launch. Can I connect for the first time via Bluetooth?

The initial connection between your HP iPAQ and the desktop WMDC application needs to happen with a mini-USB synchronization cable. After this initial connection, you will be able to set up Bluetooth for future connections. Which factors degrade the GPS signal and affect accuracy? 105 22 Guidelines for care and maintenance It is recommended that you follow certain guidelines to prevent possible damage to your HP iPAQ and to keep it in a good condition. Use your HP iPAQ Avoid using your HP iPAQ in dusty and extremely high or low temperature environments. Do not spill water on your HP iPAQ or use it in the rain. Avoid removing the battery without turning off your HP iPAQ in advance. Do not apply strong force or shock to your HP iPAQ. Keep the HP iPAQ and its accessories away from children. Do not insert metal objects into the charging/communications port of your HP iPAQ. This can short-circuit the battery and result in danger. Transfer your SMS messages from the HP iPAQ's memory to the SIM card memory. Cleaning your HP iPAQ Use a soft, clean, and slightly moistened cloth to clean your HP iPAQ. Do not let water come into contact with the earpiece, microphone, or the metal surface. Do not wipe your HP iPAQ with any corrosive liquid or coarse objects. This can damage the outer surface of your HP iPAQ. Carrying or storing your HP iPAQ Do not leave your HP iPAQ in extreme high or low temperature environments. Remove the battery from your HP iPAQ if it is not going to be used for a long period of time. Store the HP iPAQ and its battery in a cool, dark, and dry place. Use accessories Use original HP batteries and chargers to charge your HP iPAQ. Do not use your HP iPAQ battery and charger for other purposes. For information on accessories for your iPAQ, visit http://www.hp.com/accessories/ipaq. Use your HP iPAQ in public places Turn off your HP iPAQ or switch it to silent mode when you are asked to in public places. 106 Chapter 22 Guidelines for care and maintenance

8 HP Photosmart Mobile HP Photosmart Mobile You can use HP Photosmart Mobile to:

View pictures stored on your HP iPAQ or a storage card. Add voice or text notes to pictures. Print pictures. View a slideshow. Send pictures via MMS, e-mail attachments, or Bluetooth. Associate a picture with a contact. Assign a picture to the Today screen background. Upload an image via e-mail to snapfish. Attach a voice note to a picture To attach a voice note to a picture:

1. 2. 3.

(Cassette) button. Tap the Tap Start > Programs > Photosmart Mobile. Tap the thumbnail to which you want to add a voice note. 4. 5. 6. Tap the

(Record) button on the recording toolbar. Speak into the microphone to record the voice note and tap the

(Stop) button when finished. Tap the

(Cassette) button again to close the recording toolbar. E-mail pictures 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Tap Start > Programs > Photosmart Mobile. Tap the thumbnail to be sent via e-mail. NOTE:

If the media file is protected by Digital Rights Management (DRM), you would not be able to view or hear it. DRM is a software that enables secure distribution and prevents illegal distribution of pictures, videos, music, movies, and ring tones over the Internet. For more information on DRM, refer to the onscreen Help by tapping Start > Help and search for DRM. Tap Menu > Send > E-mail Attachment. Select the Reduce sent photo size to check box, and then select the reduction in resolution. Tap Next. 36 Chapter 8 HP Photosmart Mobile 6. 7. 8. Enter the appropriate e-mail address or use Contacts by tapping Menu > Add Recipient. Enter other appropriate information, such as an e-mail title and message. Tap Send. Snapfish Snapfish feature enables you to upload images from your HP iPAQ to your Snapfish account via your e-mail account. 1. 2. 3. 4. Tap Start > Programs > Photosmart Mobile. Tap the thumbnail to be sent via Snapfish. Tap Menu > Send > Snapfish. Select the Reduce sent photo size to check box, and then select the required reduction in resolution. Tap Next. Select the appropriate e-mail account in the Select e-mail account list and tap Send. NOTE: To get more information about Snapfish feature, tap Help. 5. 6. NOTE:

e-mail with a link to a Web page that allows you to register an account. If the e-mail account used to send the photo to Snapfish is not registered, you will receive an View a slideshow To view a slideshow:

1. 2. Tap Start > Programs > Photosmart Mobile. Tap the

(Slideshow) button at the bottom of the screen. 3. Tap the screen to view the

(Forward),

(Backward),

(Stop), and

(Pause) buttons. Snapfish 37 9 Notes Write a note 1. Tap Start > Programs > Notes. NOTE: Writing must be selected as the default input mode. Tap New. 2. 3. Write your text on the screen. 4. When finished, tap ok to return to the note list. To select handwritten text, tap and hold next to the writing. As soon as dots appear and before they form a complete circle, quickly drag across the writing. If a letter crosses three ruled lines, it is treated as a drawing rather than text. Create a copy of a note Tap Start > Programs > Notes. Tap the note you want to copy. Select the text on the screen, tap Menu > Copy. To create a copy of a note:

1. 2. 3. 4. Open the required note from the note list or a new note to which the selected content is to be copied. 5. If you paste the contents in a new note, a copy of the note displays in the note list. Tap Menu > Paste. Create a voice note To create a stand-alone recording (voice note) or add a recording to a note:

1. 2. Do one of the following:

Tap Start > Programs > Notes. If the recording toolbar does not appear, tap Menu > View Recording Toolbar. To create a stand-alone recording, record from the note list. To add a recording to a note, create or open a note. NOTE:

Tap Record. Speak into the microphone located at the bottom of the unit. 3. 4. 5. When finished recording the note, tap Stop on the recording toolbar. 6. When finished, tap ok to return to the note list. 38 Chapter 9 Notes If recording in an open note, an icon appears in the note. If creating a stand-alone recording, NOTE:

an icon appears in the note list. Also, you can create a voice note in HP Photosmart Mobile and attach the note to a picture. Create a voice note 39 10 Storage cards Use storage cards Use optional storage cards for:

Expanding the memory of your HP iPAQ Adding functionality NOTE: Storage cards are not included with your HP iPAQ, and must be purchased separately. To locate information about storage cards, visit http://www.hp.com/go/ipaqaccessories. Insert a storage card 1. Remove the battery cover, slide the storage card holder and open it. 2. Place the card in the storage card holder with the metal area inserted first. 3. Slide back the storage card holder until it fits into place. If you have trouble inserting a storage card, try the following:

Make sure you are not inserting the card at an angle. Make sure you insert the connection area (the metal area) first. Remove a storage card To remove a micro Secure Digital (SD) storage card from the storage slot on the HP iPAQ:

1. Close all programs that are using the storage card. 2. 3. Remove the battery. Press and hold the Power key to turn off your HP iPAQ. 40 Chapter 10 Storage cards 4. Slide the storage slot cover and open it. 5. Remove the storage card from the storage card slot. NOTE: HP recommends inserting the protective plastic card that came with your HP iPAQ into the storage slot when not in use. View content of a storage card Tap Start > Programs > File Explorer. Tap Up, then select the storage card folder to see a list of files and folders. Use File Explorer to view the files that are located on your optional storage card. 1. 2. If the HP iPAQ does not recognize your storage card, try the following:

Make sure to install any drivers that came with the storage card. Reset the HP iPAQ by using the stylus to lightly press the Reset button. View content of a storage card 41 11 Synchronization Synchronization software If your computer is running Windows XP or an earlier version, synchronization settings are managed through Microsoft ActiveSync. Microsoft ActiveSync 4.5 is available on the Getting Started CD. You can also visit http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile for more information or to download Microsoft ActiveSync. If your computer is running Windows Vista, synchronization settings are managed through Windows Mobile Device Center (WMDC). WMDC 6.1 is available on the Getting Started CD. You can also visit http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile to download WMDC. Copy files You can copy files to and from the computer using ActiveSync. To copy files using ActiveSync:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using the mini-USB synchronization cable. 2. On the computer, select Start > Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. 3. 4. Double-click Windows Mobile-Based Device. 5. Open Windows Explorer on your computer and locate the files to be copied. 6. Drag and drop the files between your HP iPAQ and the computer. ActiveSync converts the files so In the ActiveSync window, select Explore. that they can be used by the Office Mobile programs, if necessary. NOTE: You cannot copy preinstalled files or system files. 7. Drag and drop your files between your HP iPAQ and your computer. ActiveSync converts the files so that they can be used by the Office Mobile programs, if necessary. To copy files using WMDC:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to the computer and wait for WMDC to launch automatically. 2. Click File Management to open the Mobile Device folder for your device. 3. In the Mobile Device folder, navigate and select the file that you want to copy on your device or computer. Move the files directly into My Documents on your HP iPAQ (or into a folder inside My Documents). Migrate data from Palm Desktop to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6 If you used a Palm OS based device before purchasing your HP iPAQ, you need to migrate your data from the Palm Desktop software to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6. 42 Chapter 11 Synchronization To migrate data from Palm Desktop to Windows Mobile 6:

1. 2. Ensure that you have Microsoft Outlook 98 or higher installed on your computer. Insert the Companion CD that came with your Palm unit into your computer's CD-ROM drive. From the Discover Your Handheld screen, select Install Microsoft Conduits. Alternatively, you may reinstall the Palm Desktop software. During the configuration process, select Synchronize your handheld with Microsoft Outlook and Palm Desktop software. NOTE: Microsoft Outlook must be set as your default e-mail program to properly synchronize with the Palm Desktop software. If you need to change your settings, open Microsoft Outlook, then click Tools > Options > Other tab and check the Make Outlook the default program for E-mail, Contacts, and Calendar check box. Click Apply > OK, and then restart your computer. 3. Use the HotSync software located on the Companion CD that came with your Palm unit to synchronize your Palm information with Outlook. Refer to the instructions that came with your Palm unit for help installing or using HotSync. 4. When Outlook is synchronized with your Palm device, uninstall Hotsync from your computer. Click Start > Control Panel > double-click Add or Remove Programs. Select Palm Desktop, then click Remove. Follow the on-screen instructions. Insert the Getting Started CD into your computers CD-ROM drive and follow the on-screen instructions to install ActiveSync on your computer and create a partnership between your HP iPAQ and your computer. 5. Wireless Synchronization Cost Saving Tips How you manage the cost of synchronizing without wires from your HP iPAQ depends on your priorities. To Do this Reduce network connection or data transfer costs Extend battery life Keep your information up to date Increase the time between scheduled synchronizations, or synchronize manually. Check the details of your rate plan. Schedule synchronization less frequently or synchronize manually. During periods of high mail volume, schedule synchronization at regular but frequent intervals. During periods of low mail volume, schedule synchronization as items arrive. NOTE: The device power-down timer is reset each time you synchronize. If you schedule a synchronization interval that is smaller than the time interval set for the device to automatically power down, the device never turns off to save battery power. Troubleshoot synchronization Issues Following is a list of symptoms that might indicate synchronization issues:

No ActiveSync tone plays (or a gray icon displays), and there is no activity in the ActiveSync window on your computer. WMDC does not launch even after installation. ActiveSync tone plays, and the ActiveSync icon on your computer changes to a swirling green icon. The Retrieving settings message displays on your computer, but the ActiveSync connection drops prior to establishing the partnership. Wireless Synchronization Cost Saving Tips 43 ActiveSync is searching for a connection but cannot establish one. (The green icon on your computer continues to spin.) Synchronization has been established between your HP iPAQ and computer but connection is dropped. (The green icon on your computer stops spinning and grays out.) Firewall or other network protection software message box is displayed for ActiveSync to access the network or Internet. Following is a list of troubleshooting tips if you experience difficulty while synchronizing your HP iPAQ and computer. Try the following solutions to troubleshoot any synchronization issues:

Check the OS on your computer before you begin synchronizing information between your HP iPAQ and computer. The synchronization method varies depending on the OS running on the computer. If your computer is running Windows XP or an earlier version, synchronization settings are managed through Microsoft ActiveSync. Microsoft ActiveSync 4.5 is available on the Getting Started CD.Visit http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile for more information or to download Microsoft ActiveSync. If your computer is running Windows Vista, synchronization settings are managed through Windows Mobile Device Center. Visit http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile to download Windows Mobile Device Center. NOTE: HP does not guarantee the accurate functionality of any third party applications with Windows Vista. If you are running ActiveSync 4.5 or later and personal firewall software on your computer, please add ActiveSync to the firewall program's exception list.

(Firewall software, such as Sygate Personal Firewall, TrendMicro PC-cillin Internet Security 2005, Norton Personal Firewall, McAfee Personal Firewall, or Zone Alarm Security Suite might block synchronization.) Refer to the documentation that came with your firewall program to determine how to add ActiveSync 4.5 or later to the program's exception list. To further troubleshoot a firewall application and enable ActiveSync 4.5 or later, visit: http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile. During the ActiveSync installation, if you inadvertently left the Microsoft Exchange Server option box checked and are not planning to connect to an Exchange server, follow these steps:

Connect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Make sure an ActiveSync connection is established. On your computer, click Start > All Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. Click Tools > Options. Clear the boxes for the sync items listed under the Server group. Select the check boxes under the Computer group for those items you want to synchronize. Disconnect your HP iPAQ from your computer and wait for the ActiveSync message confirming that your device is no longer connected. Reconnect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Wait to see if your HP iPAQ connects to your computer. On your computer, in ActiveSync application, select File > Connection Settings. Confirm that USB is selected as a potential connection method. Connect your HP iPAQ to a different USB port on your computer. Check your mini-USB synchronization cable. Consider using another mini-USB synchronization cable if one is available to you. 44 Chapter 11 Synchronization Try synchronizing via a Bluetooth connection. Refer to the printed or CD-based documentation that came with your HP iPAQ for specific instructions. Once your computer and HP iPAQ restart, reconnect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Uninstall ActiveSync from your computer and then reinstall it. To uninstall ActiveSync from your computer, click Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. Then click Remove > Yes. After trying the above solutions without any success in solving your connection problem, perform a factory reset on your HP iPAQ using the HP iPAQ Setup Assistant. You can reinstall your applications on your HP iPAQ after the hard or clean reset is complete by using ActiveSync on your computer. After your HP iPAQ is synchronized properly, go to ActiveSync on your computer and select Tools > Add/Remove Programs, and then select any programs you want to reinstall. Customized links in WMDC After connecting your device to a Windows Vista system using WMDC 6.1, an image of HP iPAQ 600 Series Business Navigator pops up on the left of the Windows Mobile Device Center screen. You can set up your device to synchronize the Outlook contacts, e-mail, and other information on your device or just connect the device by skipping the setup process. After the device synchronizes with your computer, the following links are displayed on your computer:

Programs and Services Pictures, Music and Video File Management Mobile Device Settings To view a list of customized links, navigate to Programs and Services. Click more>> to view additional links for the various HP services and click <<back to go back to the previous screen. Customized links in WMDC 45 12 Tasks Set start and due dates for a task 1. 2. 3. 4. Tap Start > Programs > Tasks. Tap the task you want to set start and due dates for. Tap Edit and do one or both of the following:

Tap Starts to enter a start date for the task. Tap Due to enter a due date for the task. Tap ok. Show start and due dates in the task list 1. 2. 3. 4. Tap Start > Programs > Tasks. Tap Menu > Options Select the Show start and due dates check box. Tap ok. Set options for displaying tasks on the Today screen Tap Start > Settings > Personal > Today. Tap Items, and then select the Tasks check box. Tap Tasks to access options, then tap Options If you have a large number of tasks, you might want to specify the kind of tasks that are displayed on the Today screen. 1. 2. 3. 4. Under Display number of, select the type of tasks to appear on the Today screen. 5. In the Category list, select whether to display only tasks assigned to a specific category or to display all tasks. Mark a task as completed Tap Start > Programs > Tasks. In the task list, select the check box next to the task you want to mark as completed. To mark a task as completed:

1. 2. To mark an open task as completed:

1. 2. Tap Edit. In the Status box, tap Completed. 46 Chapter 12 Tasks 13 Messaging Understand messages To send and receive e-mail messages for an e-mail account, you need to connect to the Internet or your corporate network, depending on the account. You can send and receive:

Outlook e-mail Internet e-mail through an ISP Text messages You can also access e-mail from work using a VPN connection. E-mail in the Outlook e-mail account is sent and received through synchronization with a computer using any synchronizing software or through wireless synchronization directly with an Exchange Server. Internet e-mail is sent and received by connecting to a Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3) or Internet Message Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4) e-mail server. When connecting to a POP3 or IMAP4 server, you need to use a modem to connect to your ISP. You can use an Ethernet card to connect to the local area network your e-mail server is connected to. You can also use your HP iPAQ to connect by using a cellular line connection (for example, using MMS). Text messages are sent and received through your wireless service provider using a phone number as the message address. Folder types Each messaging account has its own set of folders with five default Messaging folders:

Inbox Outbox Deleted Items Drafts Sent Items The messages you receive and send through the account are stored in these folders. You can also create additional folders for each account. The way folders work vary by type:

If you use an Outlook e-mail account, e-mail messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are synchronized automatically with your device. You can select additional folders for synchronization by assigning them designations. The folders you create and the messages you move are then mirrored on the e-mail server. If you use an MMS account or a text message account, messages are stored in the Inbox folder. If you use a POP3 account and move your e-mail messages to a folder you created, the link between the messages on the device and their copies on the e-mail server breaks. When you Understand messages 47 connect, the e-mail server detects that the messages are missing from the Inbox folder on the device and deletes them from the e-mail server. This prevents having duplicate copies of a message, but it also means that you no longer have access to messages. If you use an IMAP4 account, the folders you create and the e-mail messages you move are mirrored on the e-mail server. These messages are therefore available from any location or device. This synchronization of folders occurs whenever you connect to your e-mail server, create new folders, or rename/delete folders when connected. You can also set different download options for each folder. Synchronize E-mail When you synchronize Outlook e-mail on the computer with your device, e-mail messages are synchronized as follows:

Messages in the Inbox folder on your computer or Exchange Server are copied to the Inbox folder of the Outlook e-mail account on your device. Messages in the Outbox folder on your device are transferred to Exchange Server or Outlook and then sent from those programs. When you delete a message on your device, it is deleted from your computer or Exchange Server the next time you synchronize. The default sync settings synchronize messages from the past three days and the first 0.5 KB of each new message is downloaded. It does not download file attachments. NOTE: For more information on starting Outlook e-mail synchronization or changing synchronization settings, see ActiveSync Help on the computer or tap Contents. Text messages are not received via synchronization. Instead, they are sent to your device via your service provider. Set up messaging accounts Set up e-mail using exchange server 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Tap Start > Messaging > New E-mail Account. Enter your e-mail address in the E-mail address box, and then tap Next. Scroll and select the Exchange server option from the Your e-mail provider list. Tap Next to synchronize outlook with your organization's Exchange e-mail server. In Server address, enter the Outlook Web Access server address and tap Next. NOTE: Select This server requires an encrypted (SSL) connection check box to ensure you always send e-mail from this account using an SSL connection. Enter the User name, Password, and Domain on the Edit Server Settings screen. Select the check box for the items you want to synchronize, and tap Finish. 48 Chapter 13 Messaging Internet E-mail Create a new POP3 or IMAP4 account You must set up an e-mail account that you have with an ISP or an account that you access using a VPN server connection (typically a work account) before you can send and receive e-mail. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. You can also perform the following functions:

Tap Start > Messaging > New E-mail Account. Enter the account name and then Tap Next. Scroll and select the Internet e-mail option from the Your e-mail provider list and tap Next. Enter your name and required account name and tap Next. Enter the incoming server name and select the required account type, POP3 or IMAP4. Change the time intervals for downloading new messages. Download attachments. Limit the number of messages that are downloaded. Setting User name Password Domain Account type Account name Incoming mail Outgoing mail Require SSL connection Outgoing mail requires authentication Use separate settings Outgoing server settings User name Password Description Enter the user name assigned to you by your ISP or network administrator. This is often the first part of your e-mail address, which appears before the at sign (@). Choose a strong password. You have the option to save your password so that you do not need to enter it each time you connect to your e-mail server. Not required for an account with an ISP. Might be required for a work account. Select POP3 or IMAP4. Enter a unique name for the account, such as Work or Home. This name cannot be changed later. Enter the name of your e-mail server (POP3 or IMAP4). Enter the name of your outgoing e-mail server (SMTP). Select this to ensure you always send e-mail from this account using an SSL connection. This enables you to send personal information more securely. Note that if you select this and your ISP does not support an SSL connection, you might not be able to send e-mail. Select this if your outgoing e-mail server (SMTP) requires authentication. Your user name and password from above is used. Select this if your outgoing e-mail server requires a different user name and password than the ones you entered before. Enter your user name for the outgoing e-mail server. Enter your password for the outgoing e-mail server. Set up messaging accounts 49 Setting Domain Require SSL for outgoing mail Description Enter the domain of the outgoing e-mail server. Select this to ensure you always send e-mail from this account using an SSL connection. This enables you to send personal information more securely. Note that if you select this and your ISP does not support an SSL connection, you might not be able to send e-mail. TIP: You can set up several e-mail accounts in addition to your Outlook e-mail account. You cannot add a new account while connected. Tap Menu > Stop Send/Receive to disconnect. Change E-mail download options You can customize the following download options for each e-mail account that you have with an ISP, or any account that you access using a VPN server connection (typically a work account). You can choose:

Whether messages are downloaded automatically. How much e-mail is downloaded. If and how attachments are downloaded (IMAP4 only). Tap Start > Messaging > Menu > Options. Select the e-mail account. Tap Next until you reach Server information. Tap Options. Enter your changes on the next three screens, and tap Finish. To change the e-mail download options, do the following:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. TIP: To send and receive messages automatically, tap Connect, check for messages and enter a time interval. Connecting automatically might result in higher connection charges. To save memory, limit the number of e-mails downloaded to your device by lowering the number of days to display. To change options for an Outlook e-mail account, tap Start > Programs > ActiveSync > Menu >

Options. Delete an account Tap Start > Messaging. Tap Menu > Options. Tap and hold the account name, and tap Delete. 1. 2. 3. NOTE: You cannot delete your text message account. 50 Chapter 13 Messaging Text messaging Text messaging is the transmission of short text messages to and from a mobile phone, fax machine, and/or IP address. A single text message cannot be longer than 160 alpha-numeric characters or cannot contain pictures or graphics. Messages longer than 160 alpha-numeric characters are sent as multiple text messages. A character count is visible when text messages (New/Reply/Forward) are composed. The count also shows how many text messages are generated when the message is sent. The Text Message Service Center phone number is provided by your mobile phone service provider. Text messaging should function correctly after activating your account. To verify the number used to change the Text Message Service Center phone number, tap Start > Phone > Menu > Options >

Services > Voice Mail and Text Messages > Get Settings MMS MMS is a method of transmitting photographs, video clips, sound files, and short text messages over wireless networks. When the phone radio is turned on for the first time, the GSM/GPRS Manager application detects the mobile phone service provider and automatically populates the MMS settings on the HP iPAQ. Alternately, you can access some MMS settings by tapping Start > Messaging > Menu > Options >

Accounts > MMS > Preferences. It is not recommended to change the MMS settings provided by your mobile phone service provider unless they request the change. MMS composer With MMS composer you can create and share your own MMS messages. You can also add pictures, videos, text, and audio to your MMS messages. To access MMS application, tap Start > Messaging > MMS MMS account has its own set of folders with five default Messaging folders:

Deleted Items Drafts Inbox Outbox Sent Items To create an MMS message:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Messaging > MMS. From any MMS folder, tap Menu > New To add picture or video to the message, tap the Insert picture/video field, and then tap the required picture or video to be added. NOTE: To view to the video clip before adding, navigate to the required file and tap the button. To insert text in the message, tap the Insert text here field and type the required text. 4.

(Play) Set up messaging accounts 51 NOTE: You can also insert a smiley by tapping the the To add an audio clip to message, tap Insert audio and tap the required audio to be added.

(Favorites) icon, and templates stored in My Text by tapping the

(Smiley) icon, favorite Web link by tapping

(Text) icon. NOTE: To listen to the audio clip before adding, navigate to the required file and tap button.

(Play) To preview the MMS message, tap the

(Play) icon at the left bottom of the screen. 5. 6. NOTE: To use a pre-made message template, tap Menu > Template > New from template > OK. Select the Always choose custom check box to view a blank message automatically. NOTE: You can also add pictures, videos, and text by navigating to the required file and tapping Select. Receive attachments Tap Start > Programs > ActiveSync. Tap Menu > Options Tap E-mail > Settings, and then select Include file attachments. An attachment sent with an e-mail message or downloaded from the server is displayed below the subject of the message. Tapping the attachment opens the attachment if it has been fully downloaded or marks it for download the next time you send and receive e-mail. You can also download attachments automatically with your messages if you have an Outlook e-mail or IMAP4 e-mail account. If you have an Outlook e-mail account, do the following:

1. 2. 3. If you have an IMAP4 e-mail account with an ISP or an account that you access using a VPN server connection (typically a work account), do the following:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Tap Start > Messaging. Tap Menu > Options Tap the name of the IMAP4 account. Tap Next until you reach Server information, and tap Options Tap Next twice, and select Get full copy of messages and When getting full copy, get attachments. TIP: Embedded pictures and objects cannot be received as attachments. An embedded message can be viewed as an attachment when using IMAP4 to receive e-mail. However, this feature does not work if Transport Neutral Encapsulation Format (TNEF) is enabled so that you can receive meeting requests. To store attachments on a storage card rather than on the device, tap Start > Messaging > Menu >

Options > Storage, and select the When available, use this storage card to store attachment check box. Receive meeting requests If you receive your e-mail messages through ActiveSync, you can receive meeting requests. When connecting directly to an e-mail server, the server must be running Microsoft Exchange Server version 5.5 or later for you to receive meeting requests. 52 Chapter 13 Messaging If the server is running Microsoft Exchange Server 2000 or later, your meeting requests are automatically received in your Inbox. However, to receive meeting requests on Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5, do the following:

Ask your system administrator to activate Rich Text Format (RTF) and TNEF support for your account. With TNEF enabled, your messages that are included in other messages as attachments are not received, and you cannot know if a message has an attachment until you get the full copy. In addition, download time might be longer. Change e-mail download options if your account is not set up to receive attachments. After you are set up to receive meeting requests, do the following:

1. Open the meeting request. 2. Tap Accept, or Menu > Tentative, or Menu > Decline. If you want, you can also include a message with the response. The response will be sent the next time that you synchronize or connect to your e-mail server, and your device calendar will be updated. Create or change a signature Tap Start > Messaging. Tap Menu > Options > Signatures Select the account for which you want to create or change a signature. Select the Use signature with this account check box if it is not already selected. Select the Use when replying and forwarding check box if required. Enter a signature in the box. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. To stop using a signature, clear the Use signature with this account check box. TIP: You can use a different signature with each messaging account. Use messaging Compose and send messages 1. 2. 3. 4. In the message list, tap and select an account. Tap Menu > New. Enter the e-mail address or text message address of one or more recipients, separating them with a semicolon. To access addresses and phone numbers from Contacts, tap To. Enter your message. To quickly add common messages, tap Menu > My Text and tap the required message. To check the spelling, tap Menu > Spell Check. Tap Send. 5. 6. TIP: To set the priority, tap Menu > Message Options If you are working offline, e-mail messages are moved to the Outbox folder and are sent the next time you connect. Use messaging 53 NOTE:

Reply or forward a message 1. 2. Tap on the message to open it, and then tap Menu > Reply, Reply All, or Menu > Forward. Enter your response. To quickly add common messages, tap Menu > My Text and tap the required message. To check the spelling, tap Menu > Spell Check. Tap Send. 3. 4. NOTE:

Message. You must check the When replying to e-mail, include body option. If you want to keep the original text with the outgoing message, tap Menu > Options then tap Add an attachment to a message 1. In an open message, tap Menu > Insert and tap the item you want to attach: Picture, Voice Note, or File. 2. Select the file you want to attach or record a voice note. NOTE: Embedded objects cannot be attached to messages. Download messages The manner in which you download messages depends on the type of account you have:

To send and receive e-mail for an Outlook e-mail account, begin synchronization through ActiveSync. Text messages are automatically received when your HP iPAQ is switched on. When your HP iPAQ is switched off (in flight mode), messages are held by your service provider until the next time your HP iPAQ is turned on. TIP: By default, messages you send are not saved on your device to help conserve memory. If you want to keep copies of sent messages in the messaging list, tap Menu > Options > Message, and select the Keep copies of sent items in Sent folder check box. If your account is an Outlook e-mail or IMAP4 account, you must also select the Sent Items folder for synchronization. To do this, tap Start >

Messaging > Outlook E-mail, and then tap Menu > Tools > Manage Folders and select the check box next to the Sent Items folder. Download messages from a server 1. 2. From any account, tap Menu > Go To and tap the account you want to use. Tap Menu > Send/Receive. The messages on your device and e-mail server are synchronized. New messages are downloaded to the device Inbox folder, messages in the device Outbox folder are sent, and messages that have been deleted from the server are removed from the device Inbox folder. TIP: To read the entire message, tap Menu > Download Message while in the message window. If you are in the message list, tap and hold the message, and then tap Menu > Download Message. The message will download the next time you send and receive e-mail. This will also download message attachments if you have selected those options while setting up your e-mail account. The size column in the message list displays the local size and server size of a message. These numbers might differ because the size of a message can vary between the server and the device. 54 Chapter 13 Messaging Install an online address book Many e-mail servers, including servers running Exchange Server, can verify names with an online address book called a directory service, using a protocol known as Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP). When you create an e-mail account, the directory service of your e-mail server is added to the Address, and you are given the option to enable it. After it is enabled, Messaging checks your contact list and then the directory service to verify names that you enter in the To, Cc, and Bcc fields. To enable a directory service or if you want to use additional services, follow these steps:

1. If you are adding a new account, ask your network administrator for the name of the directory service and the server. In the message list, tap Menu > Options > Address. In the In Contacts, get e-mail addresses from list, select which e-mail address book to check in contacts. Contacts will be checked first unless you select None. If your e-mail server is already listed, select the server's directory service check box to enable it and tap ok. If your e-mail service is not listed, tap Add In the Directory name and Server boxes, enter the LDAP directory and server names. Ask your network administrator if authentication is necessary for your server. If so, select the Authentication is necessary on this server check box, and enter your user name and password. To have messaging check this service, select the Check name against this server check box. 8. TIP: To delete a service, tap and hold the service, and then tap Delete. While synchronizing your Outlook e-mail account, disable any directory services you have installed by clearing the Check name against this server check box. This helps avoid getting error messages when Messaging tries to verify names against the service that you are not connected to. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Install an online address book 55 14 Calendar Access calendar Use Calendar to schedule appointments, including meetings and other events. You can display appointments for the day on the Today screen. To access Calendar, tap Start > Calendar. Change the display of the work week You can customize your calendar for a work week to start on Sunday or Monday. You can schedule your calendar for a five to seven-day week. To change the display of the work week:

1. 2. Tap Start > Calendar. Tap Menu > Tools > Options and do one or both of the following:

To specify the first day of the week, tap Sunday or Monday in the 1st day of week box. To specify the number of days to appear in a work week, tap 5-day week, 6-day week, or 7-day week in the Week view box. Tap ok. 3. 4. Set a default reminder for all new appointments To automatically turn on a reminder for all new appointments:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Tap Start > Calendar. Tap Menu > Tools > Options > Appointments. Select the Set reminders for new items check box. Set the time for the reminder to alert you. Tap ok. Update an appointment To update an appointment on your calendar:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Calendar. Tap the appointment, then Menu > Edit to make your changes. Tap ok. 56 Chapter 14 Calendar Cancel an appointment When you delete an appointment in calendar on your HP iPAQ, it is also deleted on your computer the next time you synchronize. If the appointment has not been synchronized with a computer, it will be deleted only from your HP iPAQ. 1. 2. 3. 4. NOTE:

and select an appointment, and then tap Menu > Delete Appointment. Tap Start > Calendar. In Agenda view, select the appointment to delete. Tap Menu > Delete Appointment. Tap Yes to delete the appointment, or tap No to keep it. In other views use the Smart-Touch Navigation wheel or the 3-Way Thumb-Wheel to scroll Cancel an appointment 57 15 Contacts Create a contact Tap New and enter the contact information in Outlook Contact or SIM Contact. If your contact list has been filtered by a category when you create a contact, that category is 1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. 3. When finished, tap ok. NOTE:

automatically assigned to the new contact. If most of the contacts you create have phone numbers that begin with the same area code, in the Contacts, tap Menu > Options and enter that area code in the Area code box. If you receive a call from a number that is not listed in your contacts, you can create a contact from the call history. For more information on creating contacts, tap Start > Help. Delete a contact 1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. 3. 4. Tap and hold the contact to delete. Tap Delete Contact. Tap ok. Change contact information 1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. 3. 4. When finished, tap ok. Tap the contact. Tap Edit and enter the changes. Copy a contact 1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Change the contact information as needed and tap ok. Tap and hold the contact you want to copy. Tap Copy Contact. Tap the copy of the contact. Tap Edit. 58 Chapter 15 Contacts NOTE: The displayed category is automatically assigned to the new contact. Find a contact 1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. 3. Do one of the following:

If you are not in Name view, tap Menu > View By > Name. Begin entering a name or phone number in the provided text box until the contact you want is displayed. To show all contacts again, tap the text box and clear the text, or tap the arrow to the right of the text box. Use the alphabetical index displayed at the top of the contact list. Filter the list by categories. In the contact list, tap Menu > Filter. Then tap a category you have assigned to a contact. To show all contacts again, select All Contacts. NOTE: To search for a contact by entering a name or number, or by using the alphabetical index, you need to be in Name view. Send an E-mail message to a contact 1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. 3. 4. NOTE: To quickly add a contact's address to a new message, tap To, Cc, or Bcc line, and then tap Menu > Add Recipient. Tap the contact you want to send the message to and choose the address, if necessary. Tap the contact you want to send a message to. Tap the address you want to send a message to. Tap the account you want to send the message from. Send a text message to a contact 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In the message list, tap Menu > Go To and select the account. Tap Menu > New. Enter the e-mail address or text message address of one or more recipients, separating them with a semicolon. To access addresses and phone numbers from Contacts, tap To. Enter your message. To quickly add common messages, tap Menu > My Text and tap the required message. NOTE: To enter symbols, tap Shift using the on-screen keypad. To check the spelling, tap Menu > Spell Check. NOTE: To set the priority, tap Menu > Message Options Tap Send. 6. If you are working offline, e-mail messages are moved to the Outbox folder and will be sent the next time you connect. Find a contact 59 If you are sending a text message and want to know if it was received, before sending the message, tap Menu > Tools > Options Tap Accounts > Text Messages and select Request delivery notifications check box. Add and remove a picture To add a picture to the contact information:

1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. 3. 4. 5. Do one of the following:

Tap the contact. Tap Edit. Tap Picture. Tap the picture you want to add. Tap Camera and take a picture. To remove a picture from the contact information:

1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. 3. 4. Tap the contact. Tap Menu > Edit. Tap Menu > Remove Picture. Use the contact list There are several ways to use and customize the contact list. You can also make a call or send a message from an open contact. 1. On the Today screen, tap Contacts or Start > Contacts. 2. In the contact list, do any of the following:

To search for a contact by entering a name or number, or by using the alphabetical index, enter the name or number into the Enter a name box. To see a list of contacts employed by a specific name or company, tap Menu > View By >

Name or Company. To see a summary of information about a contact, tap the contact. From there, you can also make a call or send a message. To see a list of available actions for a contact, tap and hold the contact. NOTE: To display a greater number of contacts on the screen, tap Menu > Options, select the Show contact names only check box, and clear the Show alphabetical index check box. 60 Chapter 15 Contacts 16 Connections You can use your HP iPAQ to connect to and exchange information with other handheld devices, your computer, various network types, or the Internet. There are several ways to get connected, including:

WLAN All these connection types can be accessed by tapping Start > Settings > Connections. Bluetooth GPRS/EDGE iPAQ Wireless The iPAQ Wireless application provides centralized control of all the wireless features available on your HP iPAQ. To configure networks using iPAQ Wireless:

1.

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. Tap the To customize additional settings, select the appropriate wireless network tab. 2. The All tab is the default tab and is used to change the status of available networks. On the Phone tab, you can toggle the power status and access the phone and data settings. You can even view the operator network name and phone version information. NOTE: At the bottom of the screen, the connected state of GPRS and International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number for the GSM module is displayed. On the WLAN tab, you can toggle the power status and access the WLAN and VPN & Proxy settings. You can even view the name of the access point the adapter is connected to and the version information. NOTE: At the bottom of the screen, the IP and MAC addresses of the WLAN adapter are displayed. On the Bluetooth tab, you can toggle the power status and gain access to the Bluetooth settings and Bluetooth Manager application. You can even view the Bluetooth version information. NOTE: At the bottom of the screen, the MAC address of the Bluetooth chip is displayed. NOTE: The Help link on each tab takes you to the help topic specific to that particular option. You can turn off all the wireless networks by tapping Menu > All Wireless Off. To view version information, time stamp, and copyright notice, tap Menu > About. You can disconnect or drop all the data connections available in your on your HP iPAQ. This feature can be accessed only if a data-enabled SIM and a data connection is available. Once the data is dropped, it can only be enabled from connections settings on your HP iPAQ. iPAQ Wireless 61 WLAN With wireless access, you do not need to use cables to connect your HP iPAQ to the Internet. Instead, access points transmit data to and from your wireless device. Your HP iPAQ can connect to an 802.11b/g WLAN or connect directly to other WLAN-enabled devices. With WLAN, you can:

Access the Internet. Send and receive e-mail. Access corporate network information. Use VPNs for secure remote access. Use hotspots for wireless connectivity.

(iPAQ Wireless) icon to access the WLAN features. On the Today screen, tap the NOTE: Use of dialup and wireless Internet, e-mail, corporate networks, and other wireless communications, such as Bluetooth devices, might require separately purchased additional hardware and other compatible equipment, in addition to a standard WLAN infrastructure and a separately purchased service contract. Check with your service provider for availability and coverage in your area. Not all Web content might be available. Some Web content might require installation of additional software. WLAN Terms It is recommended that you become familiar with the following terms as you begin to use WLAN technology. Term 802.11 standard Definition An approved standard specification of radio technology from the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) used for wireless local area networks (WLANs). Device-to-computer or ad-hoc A mode that does not use access points. It provides independent peer-to-peer connectivity in a wireless LAN. Domain Name System (DNS) The way that Internet domain names are located and translated into IP addresses. It is an easy to remember name for an Internet address. Every Web site has its own specific IP address on the Internet. Encryption Hotspots An alphanumeric (letters and/or numbers) conversion process of data primarily used for protection against any unauthorized people. Public or private areas where you can access WLAN service. These wireless connections can be located, for example, at a library, cyber cafe, hotel, airport lounge, or convention center. This service can be free or sometimes requires a fee. Infrastructure This connection mode uses wireless access points to connect to networks. Automatically connect to a WLAN network When you connect to a WLAN network, the HP iPAQ automatically detects WLAN networks that are broadcasting their signal. If your WLAN network is not set to broadcast, then you have to connect to it 62 Chapter 16 Connections manually. Before trying to connect to a WLAN network, determine if authentication information is needed by contacting your network administrator. 1. Tap the

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. 2. Tap the

(WLAN) icon to turn on WLAN. 3. Once your HP iPAQ detects a WLAN network, you are asked to choose if you want to connect. Select the network you want to connect to and tap Connect. Manually connect to a WLAN network A wireless network can be added manually by entering the settings information to add the network. Before trying to connect to a WLAN network, determine if authentication information is needed by contacting your network administrator. 1. Tap

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. 2. 3. 6.

(WLAN) icon to turn on WLAN. Tap the Tap Start > Settings > Connections > iPAQ Wireless > WLAN > View WLAN Networks >

Wireless > Add New Enter the network name. 4. 5. Choose a connection method. Select The Internet to connect to the Internet through an ISP or select Work to connect to a company network in the Connects to box. You should select Work if the network requires a proxy server. Tap Next. To use authentication, select an authentication method from the Authentication list. To use data encryption, select an encryption method from the Data Encryption list. To automatically use a network key, tap The key is automatically provided check box, else enter the Network key and Key index. Find an IP address 1. 2. Tap the

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. Tap the

(WLAN) icon to turn on WLAN. 3. Connect to a network automatically or manually by tapping Start > Settings > Connections >

iPAQ Wireless > WLAN > View WLAN Networks > Network Adapters. Select a WLAN network. The WLAN IP address is displayed on the screen. 4. Delete a wireless network You can delete networks you manually entered. However, you cannot delete automatically detected networks. WLAN 63 To delete an existing or available wireless network:

1. Tap the

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. 2. 3. 4. 5.

(WLAN) icon to turn on WLAN. Tap the Tap WLAN > View WLAN Networks > Wireless. In the Configure Wireless Networks box, tap and hold the network you want to delete. Tap Remove Settings. Configure 802.1x authentication settings Before performing these steps, determine if authentication information is needed by contacting your network administrator. 1. To manually enter information, tap Start > Settings > Connections > iPAQ Wireless > WLAN >

View WLAN Networks > Network Adapters. Select the network you want to configure. For increased security, on the Configure Network Authentication screen, select Use IEEE 802.1x network access control check box and select the appropriate EAP type. 2. 3. Bluetooth Bluetooth terms It is recommended that you become familiar with the following terms as you begin to use Bluetooth technology. Term Authentication Authorization Bonding (Paired devices) Device address Device discovery Device ID Encryption Passkey Personal Information Manager (PIM) 64 Chapter 16 Connections Definition Verification of a numeric passkey before a connection or activity can be completed. Approval of a connection, access, or activity before it can be completed. Creating a trusted connection between your device and another. After a bond is created, the two devices become paired. A paired device does not require authentication or authorization. Unique electronic address of a Bluetooth device. Location and recognition of another Bluetooth device. Name that a Bluetooth device provides when discovered by another device. Method of protecting data. Code you enter to authenticate connections or activities requested by other devices. Collection of programs used to manage daily business tasks

(for example: Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks). Term Profiles Service discovery Bluetooth manager Definition Collection of Bluetooth settings. Determination of which programs you have in common with other devices. Use Bluetooth Manager to:

Establish connections Exchange business cards Display shortcuts To use Bluetooth Manager:

1. Tap the

(Bluetooth) icon to turn Bluetooth on. 2.

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. Tap the Tap Bluetooth > Bluetooth Connections. The first screen that displays is My Shortcuts. 3. When you are required to locate a device and connect to it, the Bluetooth browser searches for other Bluetooth devices. Connect to a computer via Bluetooth For best results, connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using USB to establish a synchronization before connecting via Bluetooth. 1. Follow the instructions in ActiveSync Help on the computer for configuring Bluetooth on your computer to support ActiveSync. 2. On your HP iPAQ, tap Start > Programs > ActiveSync. 3. 4. Tap Menu > Connect via Bluetooth. Make sure the device and computer are within close range. If this is the first time you have connected to this computer via Bluetooth, complete the Bluetooth wizard on your HP iPAQ and set up a Bluetooth partnership with the computer. Tap Sync. 5. 6. When finished, tap Menu > Disconnect Bluetooth. TIP: To preserve battery power, turn off Bluetooth. Use your HP iPAQ as a wireless modem with Bluetooth You can use your HP iPAQ as a wireless modem, so that you can connect your Bluetooth-enabled computer to the Internet. 1. 2. Make sure that your HP iPAQ is discoverable. Turn on Bluetooth on both, your HP iPAQ and your computer. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth > Mode. Select Make this device visible to other devices check box. Bluetooth 65 3. 4. Place the HP iPAQ within 3 meters (approximately 10 feet) of the computer and open the Bluetooth management software provided with your computer. Refer to the computer documentation on Bluetooth and search for all Bluetooth devices. Select your HP iPAQ from the resulting list and perform the necessary procedures to pair the devices via Bluetooth. 5. Once the devices are paired using the Bluetooth management software on your computer, discover the available Bluetooth services offered by the HP iPAQ and select dialup networking. 6. On your HP iPAQ, tap Accept to complete the connection, if you are asked to do so. 7. On your computer, a user name and password screen is displayed. Contact your mobile phone service provider to obtain the appropriate username and password. Enter *99 in the dial field and tap Talk. 8. NOTE: The computer initially indicates that your HP iPAQ is dialing. After a short period of time, it displays the network is verifying the username and password. Next, the computer registers on the network and connects. Your HP iPAQ displays a notification indicating an active connection. NOTE:

the notification. The GPRS icon does not change to show when you are connected. If you tap on the icon, the notification displays again, and it allows you to disconnect or re-hide Bluetooth device profiles The functions that Bluetooth supports are called services or profiles. You can communicate only with Bluetooth devices that support at least one of the following profiles:

ActiveSyncUses SPP to connect to ActiveSync on a computer Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) Audio Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) Basic Imaging Profile (BIP) Basic Printer Profile (BPP) File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Generic Access Profile (GAP) Hands Free Profile (HFP) Headset Support Profile (HSP) Human Interface Device Profile (HID) Generic Object Exchange Profile(GOEP) Object Push Protocol (OPP) Personal Area Network (PAN) Serial Port Profile (SPP) Create, end, and accept a Bluetooth partnership You can exchange information between your HP iPAQ and another device that has Bluetooth capabilities. For this, you will have to first create a Bluetooth partnership between the two devices. 66 Chapter 16 Connections NOTE: To exchange information between two Bluetooth enabled devices, make sure Bluetooth is turned on both devices. The devices need not be in the discoverable mode. 1. Make sure the two devices are turned on, discoverable, and within close range. 2. 3. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. Tap Add new device Your HP iPAQ searches for other devices with Bluetooth capabilities and displays them in the list. Tap the name of the other device, and tap Next. In Security, if you want to use a secure, encrypted connection (recommended for enhanced security), check this box, and tap Next. Otherwise, leave the Security field blank and tap Next. Enter the same passkey on the other device. Tap Finish. To give the partnership a more meaningful name, tap and hold the device name under My Shortcuts, then tap Rename. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. Tap and hold the partnership you want to end. Tap Delete. To end a Bluetooth Partnership:

1. 2. 3. To accept a Bluetooth partnership:

1. Make sure your device is turned on, discoverable, and within close range. 2. When prompted to accept a partnership with the device that is requesting the relationship, tap Yes. 3. If a passkey is requested, enter an alphanumeric passkey between 1 and 16 characters in Passkey box and tap Next. Enter the same passkey in the device requesting the partnership. Using a passkey provides greater security. To give the partnership a more meaningful name, change the name of the device in Name box. Tap Finish. 4. 5. If you cannot discover another device, try the following:

Make sure Bluetooth is turned on. Move closer to the device. Make sure the device you are attempting to connect to is on and allows access of being discovered by other devices. Rename a Bluetooth partnership 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. Tap Current profile. Select the partnership you want to rename, and tap Rename. In Enter the name of the new profile box, enter a new name for the partnership. Tap ok. Bluetooth 67 Pair and unpair devices You can pair devices such that they exchange a computer generated security key prior to each connection. The security key is generated from a unique Bluetooth device address, a random number, and a user-defined password. After two devices are paired, they have a trusted relationship with each other. You do not need to give any additional input. Without giving constant authorization, your connections and activities can then be performed between the paired devices. To pair devices:

1.

(Bluetooth) icon to turn Bluetooth on. Tap the 2.

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. Tap the Tap Bluetooth > Bluetooth Connections > Menu > Paired devices. Tap Add, and then tap Lookup. Tap a device name. Enter a password in the Passkey field. Tap ok. Enter the same password into the other device. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. NOTE: Some devices, such as mobile phones, need to be placed in a mode to accept a bond from another device. Refer to that devices user instructions for more information. If you can see other devices, but you cannot connect or exchange data with them, try the following:

Make sure the other device has not restricted your access. Try initiating pairing from the other device. Some Bluetooth devices can only initiate pairing and cannot respond to pairing requests from other devices. If other devices cannot find or connect to your HP iPAQ, try the following:

Make sure Bluetooth is turned on. Make sure you have not restricted other devices from finding your HP iPAQ. Refer to Requiring a Passkey or Bond for more information. Check your Bluetooth settings to make sure you have allowed your device to be discovered by others to connect. To remove a paired relationship between devices:

1. Tap the

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. 2. Make sure that Bluetooth is already on. If not, turn on Bluetooth. 3. 4. 5. 6. Tap Bluetooth > Bluetooth Connections > Menu > Paired devices. Tap a device name. Tap Remove. Tap Yes to remove the pairing. 68 Chapter 16 Connections Make a device discoverable Tap Start > Settings > Connections. Tap Bluetooth > Mode. Select the Make the device visible to other devices check box. When your HP iPAQ is discoverable, other devices with Bluetooth capabilities can detect, your HP iPAQ and attempt to beam information to it, establish a partnership, or use a Bluetooth service. 1. 2. 3. NOTE:

other devices check box. Open Bluetooth settings If you no longer want your HP iPAQ to be discoverable, clear the Make the device visible to 1. 2. 3. Tap the

(Bluetooth) icon to turn Bluetooth on.

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. Tap the Tap Bluetooth > Bluetooth Settings. Authorization to access services If you choose to require authorization to access services, you have to authorize each connection. Your HP iPAQ always asks you if the connection should be permitted. 1.

(Bluetooth) icon to turn Bluetooth on. Tap the 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. Tap the Tap Bluetooth > Bluetooth Settings > Services. Tap the service you want to enable: File Transfer, Information Exchange, Serial Port, Personal Network Server, Hands Free, or Dialup Networking Server. Select Authorization required. Tap ok. Use a passkey or bond To establish a secure connection with another device, you can use the passkey feature or an established bond. You can also add data encryption to this type of security. A passkey is a code you enter to authenticate connections requested by other devices. The passkey must be known and used by both parties or the connection will not be allowed. 1.

(Bluetooth) icon to turn Bluetooth on. Tap the 2. 3. 4. 5.

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. Tap the Tap Bluetooth > Bluetooth Settings > Services. Tap the service you want to enable: File Transfer, Information Exchange, Serial Port, Personal Network Server, Hands free, or Dialup Networking Server. Select Authorization required and Authentication (Passkey) required if you want more security. Bluetooth 69 6. 7. Select Encryption Required if you want all data exchanged between the devices to be encrypted. Tap ok. Set a Bluetooth shared folder You can determine the folder that other devices access when they connect to your HP iPAQ. 1.

(Bluetooth) icon to turn Bluetooth on. Tap the 2.

(iPAQ Wireless) icon. Tap the Tap Bluetooth > Bluetooth Settings > Services. 3. 4. Under Bluetooth Services, tap File Transfer. 5. Under Service Settings, select your preferred settings. 6. 7. 8. Tap Advanced. Tap the Folder icon and locate a required file folder. Tap ok. Set up an incoming or outgoing Bluetooth COM port 1. Make sure your HP iPAQ is connected to the other device via Bluetooth. 2. 3. 4. Tap Start > Settings > Connections. Tap Bluetooth > COM Ports. Tap New Incoming Port or New Outgoing Port. NOTE: New Outgoing Port is only available if at least one Bluetooth device supports serial

(COM) connection. Select a numbered COM port from the list. NOTE:

If the port cannot be created, it is in use. Select a different numbered port. To limit communication on this COM port to only devices with which the HP iPAQ has a Bluetooth partnership, select the Secure Connection check box. Tap Finish. 5. 6. 7. GPRS/EDGE GPRS/EDGE GPRS/EDGE technology provides a connection to the Mobile Phone Network that can be used for Web browsing, MMS messaging, or accessing your corporate network. NOTE: EDGE is an enhancement to GPRS technology and enables higher speed data connections than GPRS. This means faster phone multimedia capabilities such as sending and receiving SMS/MMS messages, and sharing video clips. Check with your service provider to see if they support EDGE technology. If your service provider does not support the EDGE network, the HP iPAQ defaults to GPRS. 70 Chapter 16 Connections Change GPRS network settings The first time you use your SIM Card, the GSM/GPRS Manager automatically detects the phone network and operator and sets up the GPRS connection information for you. You can change these settings to your own preference or create your own network settings. 1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Phone Data Manager. If your operator name displays in the drop-down list, it is recommended that you use that connection and, if needed, edit the default settings. Edit network parameters CAUTION: Editing Network Parameters is not recommended unless you are being assisted by your mobile phone service provider. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Phone Data Manager > Edit network parameters Tapping Edit network parameters gives you access to the following areas:

Internet Connection Information Walks you through the different settings for GPRS and Circuit Switched Data (CSD) connections. MMS Multimedia Messages Allows you to modify the MMS address. WAP Information Allows you to modify the IP Address and Port for the Wireless Access Point

(WAP) Gateway. Edit an Internet connection 1. 2. 3. 4. Tap Internet Connection Information. Tap the connection you want to edit, and then tap Next. Enter a name for the connection such as the carrier name, and then tap Next. Enter the following information and tap Next:

APN Access Point Name of the server to which you are attempting to connect. Name Log on for your connection. Password Password for your connection. Tap Next. 5. 6. On the next screen, choose one of the following and tap Next:

Dynamic Internet Protocol (IP) address Static IP address 7. On the next screen, choose one of the following and tap Next. Dynamic DNS addresses Static DNS addresses Tap Finished. 8. GPRS/EDGE 71 Edit MMS multimedia messages settings Tap MMS Multimedia Messages. 1. 2. Under Enter the MMS Center Address, enter the URL where all MMS messages are sent for delivery by your mobile phone service network. Enter the following information:

APN Access Point Name of the MMS server being connected. Name Log on name for the MMS server. Password Password for the MMS server. Tap Next. Enter the IP address and the Port number for the WAP MMS Gateway and tap Finished. 3. 4. 5. Edit WAP information settings Tap WAP Information. Enter the IP address and the Port information for the WAP Gateway. Tap Next. Enter the IP address and the Port information for the secure WAP Gateway. Tap Finished. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Troubleshoot automatic detection If the automatic network detection fails, you can manually relaunch the application by tapping Start >

Settings > Connections > Phone Data Manager > Automatic detection If the automatic detection setting fails, complete one or more of the following items:

Check to see if the SIM card is present in the HP iPAQ. If it is not present, insert the SIM card and relaunch the application. Ensure that the metal contacts on your SIM card and your SIM slot are not covered with a residue or dust that would inhibit a connection. Select the appropriate country and operator name, and then tap ok. The settings automatically update. If your operator name does not appear in the drop-down list, you must manually add it to the list by tapping the down arrow in the Operator box and tapping Create New. Advanced settings Connect to intranet URLs To connect to intranet sites that have periods in their URLs (for example, intranet.companyname.com), add them to the Work URL Exceptions list. 1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections > Advanced > Exceptions Tap Add new URL In Work URL, enter the intranet URL. 72 Chapter 16 Connections NOTE:

individually by entering *.companyname.com. If you use many URLs that share the same root company name, you can avoid entering them Change an intranet URL Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections > Advanced > Exceptions. Tap the intranet URL exception you want to change, then make the required changes. 1. 2. NOTE: To delete a work URL exception, tap and hold it in the list, then tap Delete. Set up an automatic choice for connections If you have already created more than one connection, you can set up your HP iPAQ to connect to the best available connection automatically. 1. 2. Under My ISP or My Work Network, tap Add a new modem connection to create a new Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections > Tasks. connection. After you create a new connection, under My ISP or My Work Network, tap Manage existing connections. Tap Auto pick. 3. 4. Set up proxy server settings If you are connected to your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or private network during synchronization, your device should download proper proxy settings during synchronization from your computer. If these settings are not on your computer or need to be changed, you can change them manually. Before you begin, obtain the following information from your ISP or network administrator:

User name Password Proxy Server name Port Type of Socks protocol used To set up proxy server settings:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections > Tasks. If a proxy server has not been set up, tap Set up my proxy server, else tap Edit my proxy server. Select the This network connects to the Internet and This network uses a proxy server to connect to the Internet check boxes. In the Proxy server box, enter the proxy server name. To change such settings as port number or proxy server type, tap Advanced and change the required settings. Set up a WAP gateway 4. 5. To access Wireless Access Point (WAP) sites through Internet Explorer, configure your device to use a WAP gateway. Advanced settings 73 3. 4. 5. 6. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Before you begin, obtain the following information from your ISP or network administrator:

User name Password ISP server phone number WAP gateway server name 1. Port number Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections > Advanced > Select Networks > Edit If a proxy server has not been set up, tap New 2. On the Proxy Settings tab, select the This network connects to the Internet and This network uses a proxy server to connect to the Internet check boxes. If necessary, in the Proxy server box, enter the proxy server name. Tap Advanced > WAP. In the Server box, enter the WAP gateway server name. Under Port, enter the port number. The most common WAP port number is 9201. Enter any logon credentials required by the WAP gateway server. Configure advanced proxy settings 1. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections > Advanced > Select Networks > Edit If a proxy server has not been set up, tap New 2. On the Proxy Settings tab, select the This network connects to the Internet and This network uses a proxy server to connect to the Internet check boxes. If necessary, in the Proxy server box, enter the proxy server name. For the appropriate server type, enter the proxy server name and port. If necessary, enter the credentials for connecting with your proxy server. Tap Advanced > Socks. Select Socks 4 or Socks 5. If using Socks 5, enter the credentials for connecting with your proxy server. Advanced connection settings 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Tap the

(iPAQ Wireless) icon.

(WLAN) icon to turn on WLAN. Tap the To connect to a network, tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections > Advanced >

Select Networks. Select My ISP to connect to the Internet through an ISP or select My Work Network to connect to a company network. Select My Work Network if the network requires a proxy server. If you need to change or create a new network management name, tap Edit or New, and then tap ok. From the Connections screen, tap Advanced to set up your Dialing Rules and Exceptions and tap ok. 74 Chapter 16 Connections Set up a VPN server connection A VPN connection helps you to securely connect to servers, such as a corporate network, via the Internet. Before you begin, obtain the following information from your network administrator:

User name Password Domain name TCP/IP settings Host name or IP address of the VPN server To set up a VPN server connection:

1. 2. Under My Work Network, tap Add a new VPN server connection and follow the instructions in Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections > Tasks. the New Connection wizard. 3. Under most circumstances, you should not change any advanced settings. However, you need to change advanced settings when:

The server to which you are connecting does not use dynamically-assigned addresses, and you need to enter your TCP/IP settings. You need to change server DNS or WINS settings. If either of these circumstances applies, from the My VPN screen, tap Advanced and fill in the appropriate information. Tap ok to save the changes and return to the My VPN screen. To view additional information for any screen in the wizard or while changing settings, tap Help. 4. Change a connection group name Your device is already set up with two groups of connection settings: My ISP and My Work Network. You can also change the name of these groups. For example, if you put all of your corporate settings under My Work Network Connections, you can change the name to your companys name. 1. 2. Under My ISP or My Work Network, tap Add a new modem connection to create a new Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections. connection. After you create a new connection, under My ISP or My Work Network, tap Manage existing connections. Tap General. Enter a name for the settings group and tap ok. 3. 4. 5. End a connection It can be useful to end a connection when you are done using it. This frees resources on your HP iPAQ and can save connection charges. When connected via a modem or VPN, tap Connections > Disconnect. When connected via cable, detach your HP iPAQ from the cable. Advanced settings 75 When connected via Bluetooth, tap Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth > Bluetooth Manager > Active Connection. Tap and hold the connection name, and then tap Disconnect. When connected via a network (Ethernet) card, remove the card from your HP iPAQ. Configure VoIP You can make voice calls using Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) and SIP- enabled Internet Protocol Private Branch Exchange (IP PBX) in addition to normal GSM calls. VoIP routes voice conversations using an IP based network. VoIP to VoIP phone calls to any provider are typically free. NOTE: You need to configure the Wi-Fi settings before you can use VoIP. To make calls using VoIP:

1. On the Today screen, tap Internet Calling, which is off by default. 2. On the Internet tab, change the setting from Never to any other available option in the Internet Calling list and tap ok. 3. On the Today screen, the Internet Calling status changes to Not Available. NOTE: Not Available status indicates that VoIP is turned on but not configured. 4. Configure your VoIP using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant. 5. Once the device is registered with the IP-PBX, the Internet Calling status changes to Available or Selected. NOTE: Available indicates that the phone has Wi-Fi access and is registered with the IP-PBX, but the next outgoing call will be over cellular. Selected indicates that the phone has Wi-Fi access, is registered with the IP-PBX, and that VoIP will be used for the next outgoing call. 6. Use the keypad to enter the number you want to dial and press the NOTE: On the Today screen, if the status of Internet Calling is No Service, it indicates that your HP iPAQ did not register successfully with the IP PBX server. To configure VoIP using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant:

1. Download and install the HP iPAQ Setup Assistant from the Getting Started CD before you begin

(Answer/Send) key. the configuration. 2. Open HP iPAQ Setup Assistant and click Manage Configuration > New. 3. Click VoIP to configure the settings 4. Enter the username and password for your SIP/VoIP account. Enter the Domain name and the Service Provider, if available. Enter the SIP Server name or IP address as provided by your network administrator in SIP Proxy box. NOTE: Select Register With SIP Proxy check box if you want to use SIP Proxy as your SIP registrar. After you enter the SIP Proxy, you do not have to enter the SIP Registrar again. Enter the Voice mail Number (optional) which is provided with your account. 5. 6. 76 Chapter 16 Connections 17 GPS navigation Google Maps Google Maps is a free web mapping service application and technology provided by Google that powers many map-based services. This includes the Google Maps website, Google Ride Finder, and embedded maps on third-party websites. It offers street maps, a route planner, and an urban business locator for numerous countries around the world. Install Google Maps To install Google Maps using synchronizing software:

1. Download the required version from http://amp.google.com/static/mptwd/glm/windows/. 2. Connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using the synchronizing software. 3. Copy the file on your HP iPAQ. 4. Using the File Explorer on your device, locate the CAB and install it. To install Google Maps using device browser:

1. Download the required version from http://amp.google.com/static/mptwd/glm/windows/. 2. Tap Install after downloading the file. Launch and navigate Google Maps Tap Start > Programs > Google Maps. In the Terms and Conditions screen, tap Accept. In the About screen, tap ok. To launch Google Maps:

1. 2. 3. To navigate Google Maps:

1. 2. 3. 4. Tap Start > Programs > Google Maps. Tap Menu > Directions Enter your current location in the From Location box and destination in the To Location box. Tap ok to start the search. Uninstall Google Maps To uninstall Google Maps:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Settings > System > Remove Programs. Select Google Maps and tap Remove. Tap Done button. Google Maps 77 18 Applications Enjoy with your HP iPAQ by listening to your favorite MP3 music using Windows Media Player. You can also record voice clips to be sent as an attachment to family and friends. Use MS Office applications to view presentations, spreadsheets, and documents. HP applications HP Help and Support The HP Help and Support application increases visibility, accessibility, and usability of the existing help, support. To access HP Help and Support:

1. 2. Tap Start > Programs > HP Help and Support. To view additional information, tap the appropriate HTML links. Serial and Model Numbers displays the products serial number, model ID, product ID, and IMEI number. HP iPAQ Quick Tips launches the HP iPAQ Tips application. Help Topics launches the Help Topics screen. Customer Support launches the Customer Support application. System Details launches the HP Asset Viewer application. NOTE: Tap About to view the application name, version number, and copyright information. HP Voice Reply HP Voice Reply allows you to reply to your e-mail messages using your own voice. You can use HP Voice Reply to reply to your e-mail messages or compose new e-mail. You can use this feature while either replying to all, replying to the sender, or forwarding a message. Use HP Voice Reply with your Outlook account as well as the POP3 and IMAP4 accounts from your HP iPAQ. You can access HP Voice Reply in three different views:

List View While reviewing a list of messages in the Inbox. Read View While reading a particular message from the list of messages in the Inbox. Compose View While composing a new e-mail message, replying to an e-mail message, or forwarding an e-mail message. 78 Chapter 18 Applications To use HP Voice Reply:

1. When composing a new e-mail message or replying or forwarding a message, tap Menu >

HP Voice Reply to select either of the following options:

Reply to Sender To send your reply only to the recipient who initially sent you the e-mail message. Reply to All To send your reply to all the recipients of the initial e-mail message. Forward To forward the initial e-mail message with your reply to any recipient. NOTE: The three submenu options: Reply to Sender, Reply to All, and Forward are available under the List and Read views. 2. Next, in the recording window, tap the 3.

(Record) button to record your message.

(Stop) button when you finish recording your message. You can do one of the following Tap the after you finish recording:

The recorded message is automatically attached to your e-mail. Enter any short text message if required. You can also make changes to the editable fields in the e-mail. Tap Send to send the message to the recipient. 4. 5. 6. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant Use HP iPAQ Setup Assistant to simplify configuring settings on your HP iPAQ. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant lets you save the settings on your computer. This can help you restore configuration settings on your HP iPAQ at any time. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant also allows you to perform a factory reset on your HP iPAQ and view detailed product information. Using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant, you can manage multiple configurations and apply them quickly to your HP iPAQ. You can create a new configuration, modify existing settings, delete a selected configuration, or apply selected settings to your HP iPAQ. Select the following tabs to configure your settings:

Owner Information Enter your identification information and notes to describe you and your HP iPAQ. This is helpful if you lose your HP iPAQ. Wireless Network Wireless network settings describe the configuration needed to connect to your work, home, or other wireless network. Proxy Proxy servers are located between two networks and are used to help prevent an attacker from invading a private network. You can enter proxy settings to specify the proxy configuration for your network. E-mail E-mail settings describe the configuration required to connect to and check your Internet e-mail accounts. Exchange Server Exchange Server is used to access e-mail, calendars, contacts, tasks, and other mailbox contents while on the go. You can set up Outlook on your HP iPAQ to synchronize directly with your organization's Exchange Server. VoIP VoIP routes voice conversations using an IP-based network. VoIP to VoIP phone calls to any provider are typically free. SIP Proxy servers are used to implement call-routing policies and provide features to users. HP applications 79 Speed Dial HP iPAQ Setup Assistant helps you to create and manage a list of speed dial numbers for your HP iPAQ. NOTE: The first speed dial entry is usually reserved for Voice mail by your phone service provider, and your service provider might also reserve an entry for emergency response. Browser Favorite Use your HP iPAQ Setup Assistant to create and manage a list of your favorite URLs. You can access these URLs using the Internet Explorer on your HP iPAQ. Finish In case of a new configuration, after you click Finish, enter a configuration name and an optional password, and then click OK in the save configuration. If this is an existing configuration, the existing name and password will be used. HP iPAQ Shortcuts Use HP iPAQ Shortcuts Use HP iPAQ Shortcuts to access a list of shortcuts to your favorite applications or features on your HP iPAQ. To use HP Shortcuts:

1. 2. NOTE: You can also access the HP iPAQ Shortcuts from the Today screen by pressing the left softkey. Tap Start > Programs > HP Shortcuts. Scroll and tap to select the application you want to use. Edit HP iPAQ Shortcuts You can edit the default shortcuts list or create new shortcuts and store them in the existing list. To edit a shortcut:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Scroll to the shortcut you want to edit in HP iPAQ Shortcuts list and tap Menu > Edit. To change the default shortcuts to different applications, tap Select new target. Select Tasks, Programs, Web Links, or File and tap Select. Select an application for which you want to create a shortcut. The selected application is shown in the Shortcut Name box. Tap Save to save the application shortcut in the shortcut list. NOTE: To modify the name, specify a new name in the Shortcut name box and press Save to save the modified name. HP iPAQ DataConnect The first time you use your SIM Card, the HP iPAQ DataConnect application automatically detects the phone network and operator and, configures the GPRS/EDGE settings. You can also launch the application and manually select the operator. 80 Chapter 18 Applications

To configure the data settings:

1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > Connections > HP iPAQ DataConnect. Select a country and operator, and then tap Select to configure the network settings for the selected operator. The data settings will be retrieved each time you try to connect to the Internet using GPRS. It is not recommended to manually configure using HP iPAQ DataConnect. 3. WARNING!

HP Asset Viewer Using the HP Asset Viewer application, you can view information about the system, integrated modules, and attached accessories. To access HP Asset Viewer:

1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > System > HP Asset Viewer. To view additional system information, tap the appropriate tabs. The Identify tab displays the serial number and the user information. The Memory tab displays the iPAQ device memory information. The Version tab displays the iPAQ device Version information The Display tab displays the iPAQ device display panel information. The System tab displays the iPAQ device system information. The Camera tab displays the iPAQ device Camera information. The Bluetooth tab displays the iPAQ device Bluetooth information. The WLAN tab displays the iPAQ device WLAN information. The GSM tab displays the iPAQ device GSM information. The GPS tab displays the iPAQ device GPS information. Certificate Enroller Certificate Enroller is an enhanced security feature for retrieving and registering new certificates. This application-initiated enrollment allows you to request a user certificate from a certificate server. NOTE: Certificate Enroller picks up certificate types from Active Directory as well as from the device data store. You must enter a server name for retrieving the certificate, and if required, a valid username and password. To access Certificate Enroller:

1. 2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter server name, user name, and password. Tap ok to save the Tap Start > Settings > System > HP CertEnroller. settings. NOTE: Tap Retrieve to initiate the transaction of downloading the certificate from the server. 3. Once the certificate is retrieved, tap Menu > Cancel to exit. NOTE: Tap Menu > About to view a brief description of the application, application name, version number, and copyright statement. HP applications 81 Manage certificates 1. 2. Tap Start > Settings > System > Certificates. Select a certificate tab. The Personal tab displays your personal certificates. The Intermediate tab displays the intermediate certification authorities. The Root tab displays the root certification authorities. NOTE: To view the certificate details, tap the required certificate on each tab. HP iPAQ Tips Use HP iPAQ Tips to perform operations on your HP iPAQ in a quick and efficient manner. A tip is displayed on your screen every time you turn on your HP iPAQ. Tap Menu > Next to display the next tip. To quit the application, tap Dismiss. You can also access HP iPAQ Tips by tapping Start >

Programs > HP Help and Support > HP iPAQ Quick Tips. TIP: You can also access the HP iPAQ Tips application by tapping Start > Programs > HP iPAQ Tips. HP Voice Commander Use HP Voice Commander application to look up contacts, dial a contact by name, get calendar information, play and control your music, as well as launch applications on your HP iPAQ. For more information refer Voice commands on page 24. TIP: You can also access the HP Voice Commander application by tapping Start > Programs. HP iPAQ Mobile Broadband Connect Use HP iPAQ Mobile Broadband Connect to connect your computer to the Internet using your GPRS enabled iPAQ. You need to install the HP iPAQ Mobile Broadband Connect application, which is available on the Getting Started CD. NOTE: Make sure you have installed ActiveSync 4.5 for Windows XP OS or WMDC 6.1 for Windows Vista OS on your computer before using this application. To connect your computer to the Internet using your HP iPAQ:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to your computer using the mini-USB synchronization cable. 2. The HP iPAQ Mobile Broadband Connect icon in the system tray on your computer indicating that the iPAQ has established a connection with the computer. 3. Double click on the HP iPAQ Mobile Broadband Connect icon in the system tray on your computer. Select a valid GPRS connection from the connection list on your HP iPAQ and tap Next to move to DataModem state. You can then access the Internet using the Internet browser on your computer. 4. 5. 82 Chapter 18 Applications HP Enterprise Mobility Agent (mProveDM) Use the HP Enterprise Mobility Agent to help you easily configure and manage your HP iPAQ. Visit http://redirect.hp.com/svs/rdr to download and install the HP Enterprise Mobility Agent. After you install the install different applications from the Internet on your HP iPAQ. This application requires WLAN connection with access to internet. HP Enterprise Mobility Agent, the application will configure, download, and HP iPAQ File Store You can install programs and save files to the iPAQ File Store folder, which can be accessed from the File Explorer on your HP iPAQ. Programs and files stored on your iPAQ File Store folder are not deleted even if you perform a full reset on your HP iPAQ. 1. Copy the files to be saved to the iPAQ File Store folder. 2. 3. Tap Start > Programs > File Explorer > iPAQ File Store. Tap Edit > Paste. CAUTION:

save new files or modify existing files in the hp folder. iPAQ File Store may contain a special folder called hp to store system files. Do not NOTE: Before saving files to the iPAQ File Store folder, it is a good idea to determine how much memory is available in the folder. To view the amount of memory, tap Start > Settings > System >

Memory > Storage Card, and then select iPAQ File Store from the list. HP PrintSmart Mobile Use HP PrintSmart Mobile to print information from your HP iPAQ mobile device to a compatible printer while away from the office and whenever you need it. HP PrintSmart Mobile application provides printing support over Bluetooth, IR, and Wi-Fi network. It also provides printing support for various document formats including .doc, .xls, .jpg, .bmp, and .html. You can also configure various printers and manage print jobs. For more information, refer the Getting Started CD. HP Keyguard The HP Keyguard application deactivates your iPAQ touch screen and keys to prevent accidental activation of the device or any of its functions. To enable the HP Keyguard application, tap Start > Settings > Buttons > Lock > Enable Keyguard >

ok. NOTE: Once the device enters standby mode, the keyguard is automatically activated. To disable the HP Keyguard application, clear the Enable Keyguard check box and tap ok. The buttons on the device do not perform their functions and the touch screen is inactive until you complete the sequence to unlock the keys. To unlock this application, follow the deactivation sequence as described on the screen. NOTE: When you receive a call, the keyguard remains active and allows you to answer the call. HP applications 83 NOTE: To dial an emergency number when the keyguard is active, enter the emergency number using the keypad and press the

(Answer/Send) key. HP SecureConnect Mobile Use HP SecureConnect Mobile to automatically connect your HP iPAQ to Wi-Fi hotspots or home and office networks. You need to follow an online registration process to begin using this application. All communications carried out using HP SecureConnect Mobile supports Cisco Compatible Extensions v1, v2, v3, and v4 (CCX) and thus gives enhanced security, mobility, quality of service, and network management. HP iPAQ Ring Tone Manager With HP iPAQ Ring Tone Manager application, you can add and remove ring tones on your HP iPAQ. To add a ring tone:

1. 2. On the iPAQ Ring Tones screen, under Select Ring Tones to add to your device, all *.wav, Tap Start > Settings > System > RingTones > Add.

*.mid, and *.mp3 files stored on the device are displayed. Select the required ring tones, and tap Add. 3.

(Play) button. Use the To play the newly added ring tones, tap the tone being played. To add a ring tone:

1. 2. On the iPAQ Ring Tones screen, under Select Ring Tones to be removed from your device Tap Start > Settings > System > RingTones > Remove.

(Stop) button, to stop the ring list, select the required ring tones,. Tap Remove. 3. NOTE: You can use the HP iPAQ Ring Tone Manager application only to add and remove ring tones. This application lacks the ability to assign any file as a current ring tone. HP iPAQ Audio Applet Tap Start > Settings > System > Audio Control > Equalizer. Select the Enable Headphone Equalizer check box to enable the equalizer controls. From the Mode list, select the required mode. The HP iPAQ Audio Applet allows you to set, adjust, and save settings for the equalizer bands. Saving the equalizer settings helps in their easy retrieval. Additionally, you can define a new mode with the desired equalizer band values. To adjust the Headphone Equalizer settings:

1. 2. 3. NOTE: The equalizer settings are preset and unalterable for the predefined modes: Flat, Classical, Rock, Jazz, Dance, and Vocal. To create a new mode:

1. 2. Tap New on the Headphone Equalizer screen. In the Mode Name box, enter a desired name for the new mode and tap OK. 84 Chapter 18 Applications NOTE: The new mode name should be different from the predefined mode names. You can modify and delete the new modes. To access the Microphone settings:

1. 2. On the Microphone screen, deselect the Enable AGC check box to activate the microphone Tap Start > Settings > System > Audio Control > Mic. settings. NOTE:

3. Select one of the predefined modes: Quiet, Normal, or Noisy. 4. Use the slider to adjust the set value of each of these modes. If you enable the Automatic Gain Control (AGC), the system handles the gain level. Pocket Internet Explorer (PIE) You can launch the PIE application from the Start menu. This application displays an iPAQ-customized home page with the following icons:

iPAQ software iPAQ Mobile Windows Mobile iPAQ accessories HP shopping Each icon is linked to its respective Web page. Therefore, the appropriate Web page opens up when you tap a desired icon. Remote Desktop Mobile Use the Remote Desktop Mobile to log on to a Windows Terminal Server. This facility allows you to use all programs installed on this server. To connect to a Terminal Server:

1. 2. 3. 4. Tap Options > Display to set the color options, 256 Colors or High Color (16 bit). You can view the Remote desktop display either in the full screen mode or you can choose to fit the remote desktop to your iPAQ screen. Tap Start > Programs > Remote Desktop Mobile. In the Computer box, enter a Terminal Server name or TCP/IP address. Enter your user name, password, and domain in the respective boxes. Tap Connect. Remote Desktop Mobile 85 Tap Options > Sound to set the Remote desktop sound. You can either select to mute the sound, play the sound on the remote computer, or play the sound on your device. Windows Media Player Use Windows Media Player to enjoy your digital media in new ways both at home and on the go. Using Windows Media Player, you can play media audio and video files, and MP3 audio files stored on your phone or memory card. For a complete list of features and more, visit http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmedia. NOTE: Protected files are digital media files that are secured with a license to prevent unauthorized use or playback. Licenses are created and managed by using the DRM technology. Clear the Now Playing List Tap Start > Programs > Windows Media and select Now Playing. The Now Playing playlist displays the currently playing file and any files that are queued up to play next. You can quickly remove all items from the playlist by clearing the Now Playing playlist. 1. If you are on the Library screen, select the Now Playing category to display the Now Playing screen. If you are on the Playback screen, select Now Playing to display the Now Playing screen. 2. On the Now Playing screen, tap Menu > Clear Now Playing. Update a Library In most cases, Windows Media Player Mobile automatically updates your libraries. However, you can manually update a library to ensure that it has links to any new files that you might have recently copied to your HP iPAQ or a removable storage card. 1. 2. On the Library screen, tap Menu > Update Library 3. Wait for the files to be added, and then tap Done. If you are not already on the Library screen, tap Menu > Library Use HP Voice Commander to play media files You can play your media files by using the HP Voice Commander application on your HP iPAQ. 1. 2. Hold your HP iPAQ 10 cm away from your face and say Play Music (Media File Name) to play Press the HP Voice Commander key on your HP iPAQ. the media file. NOTE: The Play Music voice command will only play media files present in a playlist. NOTE: Press the HP Voice Commander key and say Pause Resume Music to pause or resume the media file. MS Office applications Word Mobile You can create and edit documents and templates in Word Mobile. You can also save the documents and templates as .doc, .rtf, .txt, and .dot files. 86 Chapter 18 Applications With Word Mobile, you can:

Edit word documents and templates created on your computer. Open and edit Pocket Word (*.psw) documents NOTE:

If you edit a file, you will need to save it in .doc, .rtf, .txt, or .dot format. To access Word Mobile, tap Start > Office Mobile > Word Mobile. Options available when you tap Menu allow you to:

Create a new document or edit an existing document. Format a document. Check spellings and count words in a document. Save, move, rename, or delete a document. Send a document via e-mail or Bluetooth. Excel Mobile You can create and edit workbooks and templates on your HP iPAQ with Excel Mobile. With Excel Mobile, you can:

View, edit, and create charts and graphics, which can be embedded as objects in a worksheet or placed on a separate worksheet. Enter formulas and functions, and then filter data to see the subset of information you want. Split panes to view different parts of a worksheet at the same time. Freeze the top and left-most panes in a worksheet to keep row and column labels or other data visible as you scroll through a sheet. To access Excel Mobile, tap Start > Office Mobile > Excel Mobile. To access options for organizing and formatting a worksheet, open a worksheet and tap Menu. In addition to Cut, Copy, and Paste, there are options in Menu that allow you to:

Paste cells using Paste Special Clear cell contents and formats applied to cells. Insert new cells, charts, symbols, functions, and define names in a workbook. Set dimensions for rows and columns. Align cells, set font and style for the text, and set cell borders. Create new worksheets and save, rename, or delete existing worksheets. Send a worksheet via e-mail or Bluetooth. PowerPoint Mobile Use PowerPoint Mobile to open and view slide show presentations created on your computer. With PowerPoint Mobile, you can:

Open a presentation from an e-mail message. Download a presentation from a file share or the Internet. Copy a presentation to your HP iPAQ via a storage card. MS Office applications 87 NOTE: Slide shows created in *.ppt or *.pps format with PowerPoint 97 and later can be viewed on your device. PowerPoint features that are not supported on your HP iPAQ include:

Notes: Notes written for slides are not visible. Rearranging or editing slides: PowerPoint Mobile is a viewer only. To access PowerPoint Mobile, tap Start > Office Mobile > PowerPoint Mobile. Options available when you tap Menu allow you to:

Set up a slide show. Rename, move, delete, or create a copy of a presentation. Send a presentation via e-mail or Bluetooth. Games Bubble Breaker The objective of Bubble Breaker is to have balls (more than one) of the same color deleted from the screen. The fewer balls you leave behind, the higher your score will be. To start a new game:

1. 2. 3. 4. NOTE: To recall the balls you deleted, tap Menu > Undo Move. Tap Start > Programs > Games > Bubble Breaker. Tap New Game to start a new game. Tap Menu > Statistics to select a style to display relative entries. Tap Menu > Options to edit the settings for the game. To play a game:

1. 2. 3. 4. Solitaire Tap Start > Programs > Games > Bubble Breaker. Tap New Game to start a new game. Scroll and select a ball which is of the same color as the other balls around. Tap the selected balls twice to delete the balls from the screen. The objective of Solitaire is to use all the cards in the deck to build up four suit stacks in ascending order, beginning with the aces. You win the game when all cards are on the suit stacks. To play a game:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Programs > Games > Solitaire. Tap Menu > New Game to start a new game. Tap and hold the card you want to move and drag it to the card stack to which you want to move the card. 4. Move any aces on the seven stacks to the four card spaces at the top of the screen, and then make any other available plays. 88 Chapter 18 Applications 5. Tap a card twice to move it to the four card stack on the upright corner of the screen if it belongs there. The card that is faced up on the four card stacks is always available for play. 6. When you have made all the available plays, tap Draw to turn over cards. Internet Sharing You can use your HP iPAQ as a wireless modem. The Internet Sharing software on your HP iPAQ guides you during the connection process. Insert a GPRSenabled SIM into your HP iPAQ before setting up Internet Sharing. You might also need to install the software drivers (located on the Getting Started CD) on to your laptop. Before you can begin Internet Sharing, make sure you have a cellular connection. If you do not have an active connection, you will not be able to launch the Internet Sharing application. To connect to a laptop using a USB data connection You might need to install the USB driver before connecting to your computer. If your computer has automatically added your HP iPAQ as a new modem, you can skip the following steps:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using the mini-USB synchronization cable. Your computer might prompt you for the wireless USB modem driver with a New hardware wizard menu screen. Else proceed to To set up a USB modem connection. 2. Click Next on the welcome screen of the Install Wizard. 3. 4. Select the Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended) option. Select Specify a Location and browse to the C:\ drive folder that contains the USB driver. NOTE: Click Next to allow your computer to automatically search and download the USB driver file. 5. Click Finish. 6. After installing the driver, Smartphone USB Modem will be added to the device list in the Device Manager. 7. Next, disconnect your HP iPAQ from the computer. NOTE: 56 K modems are capable of receiving 56 Kbps from a compatible service provider. Actual speeds will vary depending on line conditions. Setting Up a USB modem connection:

1. Make sure that your HP iPAQ is not connected to your computer. 2. 3. 4. 5. Now connect your HP iPAQ to your computer with the mini-USB synchronization cable and tap Tap Start > Programs > Internet Sharing. Scroll and select USB from the PC Connection list. Scroll and select the type of GPRS connection you want to use from the Network Connection list. Connect. Internet Sharing 89 To connect to a laptop using Bluetooth data connection For best results, connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using a mini-USB to establish a synchronization relationship before connecting via Bluetooth. Follow the instructions on your synchronization software help for configuring Bluetooth on your computer. To set up a Bluetooth modem connection:

1. Make sure that your HP iPAQ is not connected to your computer. 2. 3. 4. 5. Make your HP iPAQ visible and detectable. Connect the Bluetooth PAN to your computer and Tap Start > Programs > Internet Sharing. Scroll and select Bluetooth PAN from the PC Connection list. Scroll and select the type of GPRS connection you want to use from the Network Connection list. create a partnership between them. Press Connect after the partnership is established. 6. Internet Explorer Use Internet Explorer Mobile to view and download Web pages as well as browse Web sites through synchronization, or when connected to the Internet. The HP iPAQ DataConnect application detects the network settings and lets you connect to Internet Web sites. To open a link using favorite page:

1. 2. 3. Tap Start > Internet Explorer to open the Internet Explorer Mobile. Tap Favorites list and tap to open the required link. Tap Menu > Favorites to list all your favorite sites and tap Menu > Add To Favorites to add a new URL in your favorites list. Tap Menu > History to display the history. 4. NOTE: Tap Menu > Tools > Options to change general, memory, and security settings. NOTE: You can send any URL as an e-mail message by tapping Menu > Tools > Send Link You can learn more about Internet Explorer by tapping Start > Help > Contents > Browse the Web. Windows Live Messenger You can use MSN Messenger on your phone to send instant messages. MSN Messenger provides the same chat environment as of the MSN Messenger on your computer. With the MSN Messenger feature, you can:

Send and receive Instant Messages. Change your own status or view the status of others on your list. Invite others for a chat conversation. Block certain contacts from seeing your status or sending you messages. 90 Chapter 18 Applications To use MSN Messenger, you need a Microsoft.NET Passport account unless you already have a Hotmail account. To set up a Microsoft.NET Passport account, go to http://www.passport.net. After you have an account, you can use your HP iPAQ MSN Messenger feature. Sign in and out of messenger Tap Sign in after navigating to a required sign-in status. Enter your information in the Sign-in and Password box. Tap Sign In. Tap Start > Programs > Messenger to open MSN Messenger feature. To sign into the Messenger:

1. 2. To sign out of the Messenger:

Tap Menu > Sign Out to sign-out of MSN Messenger. If you do not sign out of MSN Messenger, you remain on a data connection, which might result in additional charges from your service provider. The session will not time out or end unless one of the following occurs:

User ends instant messenger session User accepts an incoming voice call An outgoing voice call is placed The device is turned off or moves out of range Send instant messages You can send instant messages from your MSN Messenger to contacts on your messenger list. To send Instant Messages:

1. 2. You can also manage your contacts and control their visibility. To manage contacts in the MSN Messenger:

Select the person to whom you want to send an instant message and tap Send. Enter your message, and tap Send. Tap Menu > Add New Contacts to create a new contact. Tap Menu > Contact Options > Delete to delete an existing contact. Tap Menu > Block/Unblock to block or unblock the selected contact from seeing your status and sending you instant messages. NOTE: Tap Menu > My Text to add common messages when composing instant messages. Tap Menu > Invite to invite a contact to an ongoing chat. You can also see who is already talking to you or change between chats by tapping Menu > Chats. Change your status You can change your status on MSN Messenger according to your need. To change your status:

1. 2. Tap and select your name in the contact list. Press Menu > Change Appearances, and navigate to select the required status. Windows Live Messenger 91 OMA DRM Client Placeholder More information required. Pocket Panel Lite Placeholder More information required. SMS cell broadcast Placeholder More information required. SIM Toolkit Placeholder More information required. Sim Manager Placeholder More information required. iPAQ power Placeholder More information required. iPAQ backlight Placeholder More information required. TTY Placeholder More information required. 92 Chapter 18 Applications 19 Product specifications System specifications NOTE: Not all models described are available in all countries/regions. For more information on specifications for your particular model, on your HP iPAQ, tap Start > Settings > System > HP Asset Viewer. System Feature Processor Operating System Memory External Power Display SD Slot Headphone Jack Antenna Audio Battery Bluetooth WLAN Camera Description Marvell PXA270 (Bulverde) 520 MHz Microsoft Windows Mobile 6 Professional 128 MB/256 MB RAM/ROM Power adapter: input 100240 Vac, 200 mA, 50 to 60 Hz and output +5 Vdc, 1 A USB charger: 5 Vdc, 100/500 mA 2.8 240x320 TFT LCD with touch screen Supports MicroSD memory Placeholder Internal WLAN and Bluetooth antennas Placeholder 1590 mAh Li-Ion removable/rechargeable battery Bluetooth 2.0, Profiles: Handsfree/ OBEX/ PAN/ FTP/ Serial Port/ A2DP, 10 m range (approximately 33 ft) High-speed, low-power, short-range wireless communication with other Bluetooth devices IEEE 802.11b/g 3 M pixels Auto-focus (10 cm to infinity) 4x Digital Zoom Video recording with audio (max. QVGA) Physical specifications Length Width US 4.61 inches 2.37 inches Metric 117 mm 60.3 mm System specifications 93 Depth Weight US 0.68 inches Metric 17.3 mm With battery: 5.149 oz With battery: 146 g Without battery: 4.021 oz Without battery: 114 g Operating environment Temperature Operating Non-operating Relative Humidity Operating Non-operating US 14 to 113 F 4 to 140 F 85 % RH 90 % RH Metric 10 to 45 C 20 to 60 C 85 % RH 90 % RH 94 Chapter 19 Product specifications 20 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo

(United States Only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call 1-800-HP-INVENT (1-800-474-6836) Federal Communications Commission Notice 95 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Canadian Notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union Notice Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with thecorrect CEmarked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. This CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. This CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, D-71034 Bblingen, Germany The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

96 Chapter 20 Regulatory notices Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN Devices France L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions: cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire-2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Battery Warning WARNING! This HP iPAQ contains a lithium ion rechargeable battery. To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. Replace only with the HP spare. WARNING! Fire, Explosion, And Severe Burn Hazard. Do Recharge, Crush, Disassemble, Heat above (100 C/212 F), or Incinerate. CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. Battery Recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, visit http://www.hp.com/recycle. Battery Disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Battery Warning 97 Equipment Warning WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, electrical shock, fire or damage to the equipment:

Plug the AC adapter into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the equipment by unplugging the AC adapter from the AC outlet or unplugging the synchronization cable from the host computer. Do not place anything on the power cord or any of the other cables. Arrange them so that no one may accidentally step on or trip over them. Do not pull on a cord or cable. When unplugging from the electrical outlet, grasp the cord by the plug or, in the case of the AC adapter, grasp the AC adapter and pull out from the electrical outlet. Do not use converter kits sold for appliances to power your HP iPAQ. Acoustics Warning WARNING! Listening to this device at high volume levels and for extended durations may damage ones hearing. In order to reduce the risk of damage to hearing, one should lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level, and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. Headsets or earphones used with this device should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. HP recommends using the headset delivered with your iPAQ (part number 455673-001) that is in compliance with EN 50332-1. 98 Chapter 20 Regulatory notices Class 1 LED Product Airline Travel Notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Medical Electronic Equipment If you have a medical condition that requires you to use a pacemaker, hearing aid, or any type of medical electronic equipment, consult the manufacturer of the equipment to determine if the medical equipment is shielded from RF energy. Turn off your HP iPAQ in health care facilities or hospitals when there are posted restrictions requiring you to do so. SAR Notice THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the international guidelines is 2.0 W/kg*. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the device. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, compliance with the European R&TTE directive must be shown. This directive includes as one essential requirement the protection of the health and the safety for the user and any other person. The highest non-FCC SAR value for this device when tested for use at the ear is 0.791 W/kg (10g). This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation other than the HP belt clip supplied with the product, it should not contain metal.

* The non-FCC SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. Wireless Notices In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, etc. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this device, please ask for authorization to use it prior to turning it on. Class 1 LED Product 99 U.S. Regulatory Wireless Notice WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antenna should be minimized. No metallic body accessories are allowed and 2.5 cm spacing between PDA and the body must be maintained to satisfy RF Exposure. This PDA has been tested and demonstrated compliance when WLAN with Bluetooth,and GSM with Bluetooth are transmitting simultaneously. The highest FCC SAR value for this device when tested for use at the head is 1.46 W/kg and when tested for use at the body is 1.49 W/kg. This PDA must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. SAR compliance for body-worn operations is restricted to the holster <M/N: 459084-001> designated or supplied for this product and to belt-clips, holsters, or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and which provide at least 2.5cm separation between the device and the users body. Canadian Regulatory Wireless Notice Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Brazilian Notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Singaporean Wireless Notice Switch off your cellular telephone when in an aircraft. The use of cellular telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the cellular network, and is illegal. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action or both. Users are advised not to use the equipment when at a refueling point. Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress. The use of the Alert device to operate a vehicles lights or horn on public roads is not permitted. It is advised that a handheld microphone or telephone handset should not be used by the driver while the vehicle is moving, except in an emergency. Speak only into a fixed, neck slung or clipped-on microphone when it would not distract your attention from the road. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, it is recommended that no part of the human body be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. 100 Chapter 20 Regulatory notices Japanese Notice Wireless LAN 802.11b Devices Wireless LAN 802.11g Devices Bluetooth Devices Taiwan DGT Notice Japanese Notice 101 1. SAR ? 1.6W/Kg ;

??GSM:900 1.0 W/Kg PCN:1800 0.497 W/Kg 2. Korean Notice 102 Chapter 20 Regulatory notices 21 Frequently Asked Questions I am having trouble turning on my HP iPAQ. What should I do?

Your HP iPAQ displays to have problems with the battery. Please perform the following checks:

Is the battery charged?

Is the battery properly installed?

Are the contacts on the battery and phone clean? If the contacts appear to be soiled, contact your dealer to get them cleaned. I am unable to make or receive calls. How do I fix this?

If you have problems making or receiving calls, please perform the following checks:

Is the reception of the network signal good?

Is the network set up properly? If necessary, try to select your network manually. Have you activated the Fixed Dialing, Call Forwarding, and Call Barring functions? If yes, deactivate them temporarily. Are you using your HP iPAQ with other SIM cards with the Enable SIM PIN function activated? If yes, deactivate the function temporarily. Is your HP iPAQ switched to the Flight mode? If yes, turn it off. Are you currently located within closed boundaries? If yes, move to an open space or closer to a window. I have trouble connecting to the Internet. What should I do?

If you have trouble connecting to the Internet, please perform the following checks:

Make sure you have subscribed for a data service from your service operator. Make sure you entered correct setting parameters, such as APN and IP addresses in data profile setup. I am unable to hear voices clearly. How do I resolve this?

If you are unable to hear to voices clearly, make sure you have turned off the in-call mute function. I cannot use certain call functions. What should I do?

To use certain advanced call functions, such as Call Forwarding and Call Barring, you may need to subscribe to these services from your service operator. I am having trouble turning on my HP iPAQ. What should I do? 103 Why do I hear disturbing noises during a phone call?

You may hear disturbing noises if you use your HP iPAQ near a microwave oven, speakers, or a television set. Avoid using your HP iPAQ near such items as it has an adverse effect on the voice quality. Why are the standby and talk time shorter at times?

Follow the guidelines given below to improve the standby and talk times on your HP iPAQ. The HP iPAQ may consume more power when the signal reception is poor. Try to move to an open location when you use your HP iPAQ. If you are using a new battery, it may take several charging and discharging cycles for the battery to reach its original capacity. Use the HP iPAQ after charging it completely. If your battery is very old, replace it with a new one. Avoid using the HP iPAQ in very high or low temperature environments. The efficiency of a battery can be effected by extreme temperature conditions. Why does the HP iPAQ operate slowly at times?

You should have at least 1.5 to 2 MB of free memory space on your HP iPAQ so that the device operates efficiently. To check the free memory space, tap Start > Settings > System > Memory. Remember to delete or transfer old e-mail messages and pictures on your HP iPAQ to free available memory space. Why do I see the Today screen layout error message on my HP iPAQ display screen?

You will get a Today screen layout error message if you did not select a Today screen layout. To correct this, tap Start > Settings > System > Screen and select a layout for the Today screen. I have trouble charging my battery. What should I do?

If you have trouble charging your battery, please perform the following checks:

Is the battery charger correctly plugged into the battery charger socket on the HP iPAQ?

Is the power cord of the charger damaged?

Is the battery very old? If yes, replace with a new battery and try again. I am unable to use the ActiveSync feature. What should I do?

To be able to use the ActiveSync feature, upgrade your computer to the latest version of ActiveSync. It is recommended to use ActiveSync 4.5 or a higher version. Visit http://www.microsoft.com/downloads for the latest versions. My HP iPAQ was not connected during WMDC installation?

Although you do not need to connect your HP iPAQ during the installation process of WMDC, it is highly recommended to have it connected. 104 Chapter 21 Frequently Asked Questions Which factors degrade the GPS signal and affect accuracy?

The GPS signal slows down when:

It passes through the atmosphere. It reflects off objects such as tall buildings or large rock surfaces before reaching the receiver. Performance is impacted when the device is used inside vehicles having thermal glass windshields. The thermally shielded glass blocks the GPS signal from reaching the device. You are indoor, underwater, or underground. You are running multiple applications whiile connecting. My HP iPAQ was not connected during WMDC installation?

It is not a strict requirement that you have your HP iPAQ connected during the installation process of WMDC, but it is highly recommend that you do. My HP iPAQ was connected while I was installing but WMDC does not launch even after installation?

In some cases after an upgrade, you will need to disconnect and reconnect the device for WMDC to launch. Can I connect for the first time via Bluetooth?

The initial connection between your HP iPAQ and the desktop WMDC application needs to happen with a mini-USB synchronization cable. After this initial connection, you will be able to set up Bluetooth for future connections. Which factors degrade the GPS signal and affect accuracy? 105 22 Guidelines for care and maintenance It is recommended that you follow certain guidelines to prevent possible damage to your HP iPAQ and to keep it in a good condition. Use your HP iPAQ Avoid using your HP iPAQ in dusty and extremely high or low temperature environments. Do not spill water on your HP iPAQ or use it in the rain. Avoid removing the battery without turning off your HP iPAQ in advance. Do not apply strong force or shock to your HP iPAQ. Keep the HP iPAQ and its accessories away from children. Do not insert metal objects into the charging/communications port of your HP iPAQ. This can short-circuit the battery and result in danger. Transfer your SMS messages from the HP iPAQ's memory to the SIM card memory. Cleaning your HP iPAQ Use a soft, clean, and slightly moistened cloth to clean your HP iPAQ. Do not let water come into contact with the earpiece, microphone, or the metal surface. Do not wipe your HP iPAQ with any corrosive liquid or coarse objects. This can damage the outer surface of your HP iPAQ. Carrying or storing your HP iPAQ Do not leave your HP iPAQ in extreme high or low temperature environments. Remove the battery from your HP iPAQ if it is not going to be used for a long period of time. Store the HP iPAQ and its battery in a cool, dark, and dry place. Use accessories Use original HP batteries and chargers to charge your HP iPAQ. Do not use your HP iPAQ battery and charger for other purposes. For information on accessories for your iPAQ, visit http://www.hp.com/accessories/ipaq. Use your HP iPAQ in public places Turn off your HP iPAQ or switch it to silent mode when you are asked to in public places. 106 Chapter 22 Guidelines for care and maintenance

FCC / IC Test Report APPENDIX B. Photographs of EUT Internal Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: B1 OF B13

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev. 01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: B2 OF B13

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev. 01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B WWAN Antenna 750203 GPS Antenna SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: B3 OF B13

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev. 01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: B4 OF B13

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev. 01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B Bluetooth Antenna WLAN Antenna 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: B5 OF B13

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev. 01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: B6 OF B13

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev. 01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: B7 OF B13

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev. 01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: B8 OF B13

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev. 01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: B9 OF B13

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev. 01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: B10 OF B13

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev. 01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: B11 OF B13

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev. 01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: B12 OF B13

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev. 01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: B13 OF B13

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev. 01

FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B APPENDIX A. Photographs of EUT External 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: A1 OF A14

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev.01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: A2 OF A14

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev.01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: A3 OF A14

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev.01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: A4 OF A14

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev.01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: A5 OF A14

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev.01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: A6 OF A14

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev.01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: A7 OF A14

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev.01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B

Adapter 1 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: A8 OF A14

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev.01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: A9 OF A14

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev.01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: A10 OF A14

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev.01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B

Adapter 2 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: A11 OF A14

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev.01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: A12 OF A14

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev.01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: A13 OF A14

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev.01 FCC / IC Test Report Report NO. : FG750203-B 750203 SPORTON International Inc. TEL : 886-2-2696-2468 FAX : 886-2-2696-2255 FCC ID: B94HHI14CN IC ID: 466Q-HHI14CN Page Number Report Issued Date Report Version

: A14 OF A14

: Aug. 08, 2007

: Rev.01

Calvin Label Innovating Customer Value IAC Confidential 2

Hewlett-Packard Company 11445 Compaq Center Drive Mail Stop 050807 Houston, TX 77070 www.hp.com October 9, 2007 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division Walter Overcash Product Regulatory Manager Telecom / Safety 281.514.2756 Tel 281.514.4591 Fax walter.overcash@hp.com RE: Certification Application for FCC ID B94HHI14CN Dear Sirs:

Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of CFR 47 and to avoid premature release of sensitive information prior to marketing or release of the product to the public, we request the following documents contained in this certification application be temporarily withheld from public disclosure for an initial period of 180 days:

External photographs Users manual Test Setup photographs Internal photographs The application contains technical information which Hewlett-Packard Company deems to be trade secrets and proprietary. If made public, the information might be used to our disadvantage in the market place. We understand that pursuant to Rule 0.457, disclosure of this Application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. If you have any comments or questions, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely, Walter Overcash

Hewlett-Packard Company 11445 Compaq Center Drive Mail Stop 050807 Houston, TX 77070 www.hp.com October 3, 2007 Walter Overcash Product Regulatory Manager Telecom / Safety 281.514.2756 Tel 281.514.4591 Fax walter.overcash@hp.com Subject: Modifications to HSTNH-I14C-N Dear Sirs:

The HSTNH-I14C-N was granted approval by the FCC on 09/28/07 and 10/01/07. We would like to hereby apply for a Class II Permissive Change to the equipment to allow the product to simultaneously operate the WWAN and WLAN transmitters. If you have any comments or questions, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely, Walter Overcash

Item 11. *Application is for:

Original Equipment Change in identification of presently authorized equipment:

Original FCC ID Grant Date (MM/DD/YYYY) Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment Class III permissive change to software defined radio Note: this may only be filed for applications pertaining to Software Defined Radio Item 12. Is the equipment in this application:

* (a) a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization?

* (b) part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization?

If either of the above questions is answered Yes complete section 12 (c).

(c) The related application:

has been granted under the FCC ID listed to the right is in the process of being filed under the FCC ID listed to the right is pending with the FCC under the FCC ID listed to the right Item 13. * Equipment will be operated under FCC Rule Part(s):

Item 14. EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS: Where applicable Frequency range in MHz Frequency tolerance Yes No Yes No FCC ID B94HHI14CN Low Freq High Freq 824.2 1850.2 824.2 1850.2 826.4 1852.4 848.8 1909.8 848.8 1909.8 846.6 1907.6 Rated RF power output IN WATTS 1.12 1.37 0.22 0.28 0.08 0.10 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 Emission Designator (See 47 CFR 2.201 and 2.202) Microprocessor model number

%, Hz, ppm ppm 300KGXW 300KGXW ppm 300KG7W ppm ppm 300KG7W 4M22F9W ppm 4M22F9W ppm Read each certification carefully before answering and signing this application WILLFUL FALSE STATEMENTS MADE ON THIS FORM ARE PUNISHABLE BY FINE AND/OR IMPRISONMENT (U.S. CODE, TITLE 18, SECTION 1001), AND/OR REVOCATION OF ANY STATION LICENSE OR CONSTRUCTION PERMIT (U.S. CODE, TITLE 47, SECTION 312 (a) (1)), AND/OR FORFEITURE (U.S. TITLE 47, SECTION 503).

(Continued on Next Page)

Walter Overcash Product Regulatory Manager Telecom / Safety 281.514.2756 Tel 281.514.4591 Fax walter.overcash@hp.com Hewlett-Packard Company 11445 Compaq Center Drive West Mail Stop 050807 Houston, TX 77070 www.hp.com August 22, 2007 Attestation Hewlett-Packard Company hereby declares that HSTNH-I14C-N cannot be used for simultaneous operation of WLAN and WWAN transmitters by software control. The software of the device will prohibit the co-transmission of both WLAN and WWAN. When the device is in WLAN mode and then receives the WWAN phone call, the software of this device will shut down the WLAN transmission immediately. When the device is in the phone mode and users would like to use WLAN function, the software will block the WLAN use. If you have any comments or questions, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely, Walter Overcash

Hewlett-Packard Company 11445 Compaq Center Drive West MS050807 Houston, Texas 77070 www.hp.com Walter Overcash Product Regulatory Manager Telecom / Safety 281.514.2756 Tel 281.514.4591 Fax walter.overcash@hp.com Ref: FCC ID B94HHI14CN Short Term Confidentiality Request June 13, 2007 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 Dear Sirs:

Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of CFR 47 and to avoid premature release of sensitive information prior to marketing or release of the product to the public, we request the following documents contained in this certification application be temporarily withheld from public disclosure for an initial period of 45 days:

External photographs (should be HP ExtPho.pdf) Test setup photographs (should be HP TSup.pdf) Internal photographs (should be HP IntPho.pdf) Users manual (should be HP UserMan.pdf) The application contains technical information, which Hewlett-Packard Company deems to be trade secrets and proprietary. If made public, the information might be used to our disadvantage in the market place. We understand that pursuant to Rule 0.457, disclosure of this application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the grant for this application. If you have any comments or questions, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely, Walter Overcash